WO2017110893A1 - 感光性着色組成物、硬化物、着色スペーサー、画像表示装置 - Google Patents
感光性着色組成物、硬化物、着色スペーサー、画像表示装置 Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- WO2017110893A1 WO2017110893A1 PCT/JP2016/088144 JP2016088144W WO2017110893A1 WO 2017110893 A1 WO2017110893 A1 WO 2017110893A1 JP 2016088144 W JP2016088144 W JP 2016088144W WO 2017110893 A1 WO2017110893 A1 WO 2017110893A1
- Authority
- WO
- WIPO (PCT)
- Prior art keywords
- group
- ring
- less
- meth
- mass
- Prior art date
Links
- 0 *OC(C*C(C=C)=O)COc(c(-c1ccccc1)c1)cc(OCC(COC(C=C)=O)O*)c1-c1ccccc1 Chemical compound *OC(C*C(C=C)=O)COc(c(-c1ccccc1)c1)cc(OCC(COC(C=C)=O)O*)c1-c1ccccc1 0.000 description 1
Classifications
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G03—PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
- G03F—PHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
- G03F7/00—Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
- G03F7/004—Photosensitive materials
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C08—ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
- C08F—MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS OBTAINED BY REACTIONS ONLY INVOLVING CARBON-TO-CARBON UNSATURATED BONDS
- C08F220/00—Copolymers of compounds having one or more unsaturated aliphatic radicals, each having only one carbon-to-carbon double bond, and only one being terminated by only one carboxyl radical or a salt, anhydride ester, amide, imide or nitrile thereof
- C08F220/02—Monocarboxylic acids having less than ten carbon atoms; Derivatives thereof
- C08F220/10—Esters
- C08F220/20—Esters of polyhydric alcohols or phenols, e.g. 2-hydroxyethyl (meth)acrylate or glycerol mono-(meth)acrylate
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C08—ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
- C08F—MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS OBTAINED BY REACTIONS ONLY INVOLVING CARBON-TO-CARBON UNSATURATED BONDS
- C08F220/00—Copolymers of compounds having one or more unsaturated aliphatic radicals, each having only one carbon-to-carbon double bond, and only one being terminated by only one carboxyl radical or a salt, anhydride ester, amide, imide or nitrile thereof
- C08F220/02—Monocarboxylic acids having less than ten carbon atoms; Derivatives thereof
- C08F220/10—Esters
- C08F220/26—Esters containing oxygen in addition to the carboxy oxygen
- C08F220/32—Esters containing oxygen in addition to the carboxy oxygen containing epoxy radicals
- C08F220/325—Esters containing oxygen in addition to the carboxy oxygen containing epoxy radicals containing glycidyl radical, e.g. glycidyl (meth)acrylate
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C08—ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
- C08F—MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS OBTAINED BY REACTIONS ONLY INVOLVING CARBON-TO-CARBON UNSATURATED BONDS
- C08F220/00—Copolymers of compounds having one or more unsaturated aliphatic radicals, each having only one carbon-to-carbon double bond, and only one being terminated by only one carboxyl radical or a salt, anhydride ester, amide, imide or nitrile thereof
- C08F220/02—Monocarboxylic acids having less than ten carbon atoms; Derivatives thereof
- C08F220/10—Esters
- C08F220/26—Esters containing oxygen in addition to the carboxy oxygen
- C08F220/32—Esters containing oxygen in addition to the carboxy oxygen containing epoxy radicals
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02B—OPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
- G02B5/00—Optical elements other than lenses
- G02B5/20—Filters
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02F—OPTICAL DEVICES OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE CONTROL OF LIGHT BY MODIFICATION OF THE OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF THE MEDIA OF THE ELEMENTS INVOLVED THEREIN; NON-LINEAR OPTICS; FREQUENCY-CHANGING OF LIGHT; OPTICAL LOGIC ELEMENTS; OPTICAL ANALOGUE/DIGITAL CONVERTERS
- G02F1/00—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics
- G02F1/01—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour
- G02F1/13—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour based on liquid crystals, e.g. single liquid crystal display cells
- G02F1/133—Constructional arrangements; Operation of liquid crystal cells; Circuit arrangements
- G02F1/1333—Constructional arrangements; Manufacturing methods
- G02F1/1335—Structural association of cells with optical devices, e.g. polarisers or reflectors
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02F—OPTICAL DEVICES OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE CONTROL OF LIGHT BY MODIFICATION OF THE OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF THE MEDIA OF THE ELEMENTS INVOLVED THEREIN; NON-LINEAR OPTICS; FREQUENCY-CHANGING OF LIGHT; OPTICAL LOGIC ELEMENTS; OPTICAL ANALOGUE/DIGITAL CONVERTERS
- G02F1/00—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics
- G02F1/01—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour
- G02F1/13—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour based on liquid crystals, e.g. single liquid crystal display cells
- G02F1/133—Constructional arrangements; Operation of liquid crystal cells; Circuit arrangements
- G02F1/1333—Constructional arrangements; Manufacturing methods
- G02F1/1339—Gaskets; Spacers; Sealing of cells
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G03—PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
- G03F—PHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
- G03F7/00—Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
- G03F7/004—Photosensitive materials
- G03F7/027—Non-macromolecular photopolymerisable compounds having carbon-to-carbon double bonds, e.g. ethylenic compounds
- G03F7/032—Non-macromolecular photopolymerisable compounds having carbon-to-carbon double bonds, e.g. ethylenic compounds with binders
- G03F7/033—Non-macromolecular photopolymerisable compounds having carbon-to-carbon double bonds, e.g. ethylenic compounds with binders the binders being polymers obtained by reactions only involving carbon-to-carbon unsaturated bonds, e.g. vinyl polymers
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G03—PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
- G03F—PHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
- G03F7/00—Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
- G03F7/004—Photosensitive materials
- G03F7/038—Macromolecular compounds which are rendered insoluble or differentially wettable
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G03—PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
- G03F—PHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
- G03F7/00—Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
- G03F7/004—Photosensitive materials
- G03F7/09—Photosensitive materials characterised by structural details, e.g. supports, auxiliary layers
- G03F7/105—Photosensitive materials characterised by structural details, e.g. supports, auxiliary layers having substances, e.g. indicators, for forming visible images
Definitions
- the present invention relates to a photosensitive coloring composition and the like. Specifically, the present invention relates to a photosensitive coloring composition that is preferably used for forming a colored spacer or the like in a color filter such as a liquid crystal display, a coloring spacer obtained by curing the photosensitive coloring composition, and an image display device including the coloring spacer. .
- Liquid crystal display utilizes the property that the arrangement of liquid crystal molecules is switched by turning on / off the voltage to the liquid crystal.
- each member constituting the LCD cell is often formed by a method using a photosensitive composition represented by a photolithography method. This photosensitive composition tends to form a fine structure and is easy to process a substrate for a large screen, and its application range tends to further expand in the future.
- an LCD manufactured using a photosensitive composition does not maintain the voltage applied to the liquid crystal due to the electrical characteristics of the photosensitive composition itself and the influence of impurities contained in the photosensitive composition, thereby causing the display to display. Problems such as display unevenness may occur.
- a member closer to the liquid crystal layer in a color liquid crystal display for example, a so-called columnar spacer, photospacer or the like used to keep the distance between two substrates constant in a liquid crystal panel has a great influence.
- Patent Document 1 describes a method using a light-shielding spacer (colored spacer).
- Patent Document 3 discloses that an alkali-soluble resin having a specific structure can be used to achieve light-shielding properties, step control, and adhesion to a substrate.
- the method for increasing the light shielding property include a method using a pigment having a high light shielding property and a method for increasing the pigment content ratio in the photosensitive coloring composition.
- the photosensitive coloring composition described in Patent Document 2 when the light shielding property of the colored spacer is further increased by using a pigment having a high light shielding property, the vicinity of the film surface is determined. It was found that the difference in crosslink density between the vicinity of the bottom of the film was increased, wrinkles were generated on the surface of the coating film due to thermal shrinkage during the thermosetting process, and the surface smoothness was insufficient.
- an epoxy (meth) acrylate resin and a specific (meth) acrylic copolymer resin are combined as an alkali-soluble resin in the photosensitive coloring composition. It was found that the above-described problems can be solved by using the present invention, and the present invention has been achieved. That is, the present invention has the following configurations [1] to [9].
- Photosensitive coloring containing (a) colorant, (b) alkali-soluble resin, (c) photopolymerization initiator, (d) ethylenically unsaturated compound, (e) solvent, and (f) dispersant.
- a composition comprising: The (a) colorant contains an organic pigment and carbon black, The (b) alkali-soluble resin comprises (bI) an epoxy (meth) acrylate resin, (b-II) a repeating unit ⁇ having an ethylenically unsaturated bond in the side chain and a repeating unit ⁇ derived from an unsaturated carboxylic acid. (Meth) acrylic copolymer resin containing, and The photosensitive coloring composition, wherein the content ratio of the repeating unit ⁇ in the (b-II) (meth) acrylic copolymer resin is 12 mol% or more.
- the organic pigment is at least one selected from the group consisting of a compound represented by the following general formula (1), a geometric isomer of the compound, a salt of the compound, and a salt of the geometric isomer of the compound
- the photosensitive coloring composition as described in [1] containing an organic black pigment is at least one selected from the group consisting of a compound represented by the following general formula (1), a geometric isomer of the compound, a salt of the compound, and a salt of the geometric isomer of the compound.
- R 11 and R 16 are each independently a hydrogen atom, CH 3 , CF 3 , a fluorine atom or a chlorine atom;
- Photosensitive coloring containing (a) colorant, (b) alkali-soluble resin, (c) photopolymerization initiator, (d) ethylenically unsaturated compound, (e) solvent, and (f) dispersant.
- a composition comprising: The colorant (a) includes at least one selected from the group consisting of a red pigment and an orange pigment, and at least one selected from the group consisting of a blue pigment and a purple pigment,
- the (b) alkali-soluble resin comprises (bI) an epoxy (meth) acrylate resin, (b-II) a repeating unit ⁇ having an ethylenically unsaturated bond in the side chain and a repeating unit ⁇ derived from an unsaturated carboxylic acid.
- R 1 and R 2 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
- R 3 represents a divalent linking group.
- the photosensitive coloring composition as described in any one.
- a cured product obtained by curing the photosensitive coloring composition according to any one of [1] to [6].
- An image display device comprising the colored spacer according to [8].
- a photosensitive coloring composition that can form a pattern having high light shielding properties, high reliability, and excellent surface smoothness.
- a cured product and a colored spacer that are excellent in light shielding properties and surface smoothness can be provided, and further, an image display device including such a colored spacer can be provided.
- (meth) acryl means “acryl and / or methacryl”, and the same applies to “(meth) acrylate” and “(meth) acryloyl”.
- the term “(co) polymer” means that both a single polymer (homopolymer) and a copolymer (copolymer) are included, and “acid (anhydride)”, “(anhydrous). "Is meant to include both acids and anhydrides.
- “acrylic resin” means a (co) polymer containing (meth) acrylic acid and a (co) polymer containing a (meth) acrylic ester having a carboxyl group.
- the term “monomer” is a term corresponding to a so-called high molecular substance (polymer), and includes a dimer, a trimer, an oligomer, etc. in addition to a monomer (monomer) in a narrow sense. It is.
- the “total solid content” means all components other than the solvent contained in the photosensitive coloring composition or the ink described later.
- “weight average molecular weight” refers to polystyrene-reduced weight average molecular weight (Mw) by GPC (gel permeation chromatography).
- the “amine value” means an amine value in terms of effective solid content unless otherwise specified, and is a value represented by the mass of KOH equivalent to the base amount per 1 g of the solid content of the dispersant. It is. The measuring method will be described later.
- the “acid value” represents an acid value in terms of effective solid content unless otherwise specified, and is calculated by neutralization titration.
- the photosensitive coloring composition of the present invention is (A) a colorant (b) an alkali-soluble resin (c) a photopolymerization initiator (d) an ethylenically unsaturated compound (e) a solvent (f) a dispersant as an essential component, and if necessary, a silane cup It includes adhesion improvers such as ring agents, coatability improvers, development improvers, ultraviolet absorbers, antioxidants, surfactants, pigment derivatives, and other compounding components. Used in a state dissolved or dispersed in a solvent.
- the colorant contains an organic pigment and carbon black.
- the colorant is selected from the group consisting of at least one selected from the group consisting of a red pigment and an orange pigment, and a group consisting of a blue pigment and a purple pigment. Containing at least one selected.
- the photosensitive coloring composition according to the third aspect of the present invention is for forming a colored spacer.
- the “photosensitive coloring composition of the present invention” refers to the photosensitive coloring composition according to the first aspect, the photosensitive coloring composition according to the second aspect, and the third aspect. All the photosensitive coloring compositions which concern on are pointed out.
- the (a) colorant used in the photosensitive coloring composition of the present invention is not particularly limited as long as it is a colorant that can color the photosensitive coloring composition or a cured product obtained by curing the photosensitive coloring composition.
- pigments can be preferably used.
- the pigment include organic pigments and inorganic pigments. From the viewpoint of suppressing the decrease in the voltage holding ratio of the liquid crystal and suppressing the absorption of ultraviolet rays to make it easier to control the shape and level difference, use the organic pigment. Is preferred.
- the (a) colorant used in the photosensitive coloring composition according to the first aspect of the present invention contains an organic pigment and carbon black.
- an organic pigment In this way, it is easy to control the shape and steps by using an organic pigment that absorbs less ultraviolet light, and it is easy to improve the surface smoothness.
- high blackness is achieved by using carbon black. can do.
- the kind of organic pigment is not particularly limited, it is preferable to contain at least one organic coloring pigment selected from the group consisting of a red pigment, an orange pigment, a blue pigment and a purple pigment from the viewpoint of adhesion. Moreover, it is preferable to contain an organic black pigment from a light-shielding viewpoint.
- pigments are not particularly limited, but various other than organic pigments such as azo, phthalocyanine, quinacridone, benzimidazolone, isoindolinone, dioxazine, indanthrene, and perylene. Inorganic pigments can also be used. Hereinafter, specific examples of usable pigments are indicated by pigment numbers. Terms such as “CI Pigment Red 2” mentioned below mean the color index (CI).
- C.I. I. Pigment Red 48 1, 122, 149, 168, 177, 179, 194, 202, 206, 207, 209, 224, 242, 254, 272, more preferably C.I. I. Pigment red 149, 177, 179, 194, 209, 224, 254.
- C.I. I. Pigment Red 177, 254, and 272 are preferably used.
- a red pigment having a low ultraviolet absorption rate it is preferable to use a red pigment having a low ultraviolet absorption rate.
- CI pigment red 254 and 272 are used.
- C.I. I. Pigment Orange 1 As orange (orange) pigments, C.I. I. Pigment Orange 1, 2, 5, 13, 16, 17, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 34, 36, 38, 39, 43, 46, 48, 49, 61, 62, 64, 65, 67, 68, 69, 70, 71, 72, 73, 74, 75, 77, 78, 79. Of these, C.I. I. Pigment orange 38, 43, 64, 71, 72. In terms of dispersibility and light shielding properties, C.I. I. Pigment Oranges 43, 64, and 72 are preferably used. In the case of curing with ultraviolet rays, it is preferable to use an orange pigment having a low ultraviolet absorption rate. I. More preferably, CI pigment oranges 64 and 72 are used.
- blue pigments examples include C.I. I. Pigment Blue 1, 1: 2, 9, 14, 15, 15: 1, 15: 2, 15: 3, 15: 4, 15: 6, 16, 17, 19, 25, 27, 28, 29, 33, 35, 36, 56, 56: 1, 60, 61, 61: 1, 62, 63, 66, 67, 68, 71, 72, 73, 74, 75, 76, 78, 79.
- C.I. I. Pigment Blue 15, 15: 1, 15: 2, 15: 3, 15: 4, 15: 6, 16, 60 more preferably C.I. I. Pigment blue 15: 6.
- C.I. I. Pigment Blue 15: 6, 16, and 60 are preferably used.
- a blue pigment having a low ultraviolet absorption rate I. More preferably, CI Pigment Blue 60 is used.
- Examples of purple pigments include C.I. I. Pigment Violet 1, 1: 1, 2, 2: 2, 3, 3: 1, 3: 3, 5, 5: 1, 14, 15, 16, 19, 23, 25, 27, 29, 31, 32, 37, 39, 42, 44, 47, 49, 50. Of these, C.I. I. Pigment violet 19, 23, 29, more preferably C.I. I. And CI Pigment Violet 23. In terms of dispersibility and light shielding properties, C.I. I. Pigment Violet 23 and 29 are preferably used. In the case of curing with ultraviolet rays, it is preferable to use a violet pigment having a low ultraviolet absorption rate. I. More preferably, pigment violet 29 is used.
- organic coloring pigments that can be used in addition to red pigments, orange pigments, blue pigments, and purple pigments include green pigments and yellow pigments.
- green pigments include C.I. I. Pigment green 1, 2, 4, 7, 8, 10, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18, 19, 26, 36, 45, 48, 50, 51, 54, 55. Of these, C.I. I. And CI Pigment Green 7 and 36.
- yellow pigments include C.I. I.
- C.I. I. Pigment yellow 83, 117, 129, 138, 139, 150, 154, 155, 180, 185 more preferably C.I. I. Pigment yellow 83, 138, 139, 150, 180.
- Red pigment C.I. I. Pigment Red 177, 254, 272
- Orange pigment C.I. I. Pigment Orange 43, 64, 72
- Blue pigment C.I. I. Pigment Blue 15: 6, 60 Purple pigment: C.I. I. Pigment Violet 23, 29
- the red pigment is preferably the following (1)
- the orange pigment is preferably the following (2)
- the blue pigment is the following ( 3) is preferable
- the purple pigment is preferably the following (4).
- C.I. I. At least one selected from CI Pigment Red 177 and 254 (2)
- C.I. I. At least one selected from Pigment Orange 43 and 64 (3)
- C.I. I. Pigment blue 15: 6, at least one selected from 60 (4)
- C.I. I. At least one selected from Pigment Bio Red 23 and 29
- the photosensitive coloring composition according to the first aspect there is no particular limitation on the combination when a plurality of organic pigments are used in combination.
- a blue pigment is used.
- / or a violet pigment is preferably used.
- the absorption spectrum of carbon black has a decreasing absorbance from short wavelength to long wavelength, and the absorbance in the ultraviolet region is higher than that of organic pigments. From this point of view, it is preferable to use a blue pigment and / or purple pigment and carbon black in combination, and it is more preferable to use a blue pigment and purple pigment and carbon black in combination.
- a small amount of carbon black is used, from the viewpoint of light shielding properties, at least one selected from the group consisting of a red pigment and an orange pigment, and at least one selected from the group consisting of a blue pigment and a purple pigment, Specific examples of combinations thereof include a combination of a red pigment and a blue pigment, a combination of a blue pigment and an orange pigment, and a combination of a blue pigment, an orange pigment and a purple pigment.
- a black color material can be further used.
- the black color material include inorganic black pigments such as carbon black and organic black pigments.
- an organic black pigment can be used instead of the organic coloring pigment.
- the photosensitive coloring composition according to the first aspect contains carbon black as a black color material.
- carbon black as a black color material.
- high light-shielding property can be achieved by using carbon black in addition to the organic pigment.
- carbon black the surface smoothness tends to be deteriorated, so that it tends to be improved by applying the present invention.
- Examples of carbon black include the following carbon black.
- Carbon black coated with resin may be used.
- Use of carbon black coated with a resin has the effect of improving adhesion to a glass substrate and volume resistance.
- carbon black coated with the resin for example, carbon black described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 09-71733 can be preferably used.
- Resin-coated carbon black is preferably used in terms of volume resistance and dielectric constant.
- the total content of Na and Ca is preferably 100 ppm or less.
- Carbon black is usually raw material oil or combustion oil (or gas) at the time of production, reaction stop water or granulated water, Na mixed from furnace materials of the reactor, Ca, K, Mg, Al, Fe.
- the ash content of etc. is contained on the order of percent.
- Na and Ca are generally contained in a few hundred ppm or more, but by reducing these, penetration into the transparent electrode (ITO) and other electrodes is suppressed, and electricity Tend to prevent mechanical short circuit.
- the resin-coated carbon black is preferably so-called acidic carbon black having a pH of 6 or less. Since the dispersion diameter (agglomerate diameter) in water is small, it is possible to cover fine units. Furthermore, it is preferable that the average particle diameter is 40 nm or less and the dibutyl phthalate (DBP) absorption is 140 ml / 100 g or less. By setting it within the above range, a coating film having good light shielding properties tends to be obtained.
- Average particle size means number average particle size. Photographs taken with tens of thousands of magnifications by electron microscope observation are taken in several fields of view, and particle image analysis in which about 2000 to 3000 particles of these photographs are measured by an image processing apparatus. This means the equivalent circle diameter obtained by.
- the method for preparing the carbon black coated with the resin is not particularly limited. For example, after appropriately adjusting the blending amount of the carbon black and the resin, After mixing and stirring a resin solution obtained by mixing a resin and a solvent such as cyclohexanone, toluene, xylene and the like, and a suspension obtained by mixing carbon black and water, carbon black and water are separated, 1. A method in which the composition obtained by removing water and heating and kneading is formed into a sheet, pulverized and then dried; A method in which the resin solution and suspension prepared in the same manner as above are mixed and stirred to granulate carbon black and the resin, and then the resulting granular material is separated and heated to remove the remaining solvent and water; 3.
- a carboxylic acid such as maleic acid or fumaric acid is dissolved in the above exemplified solvent, carbon black is added, mixed and dried, the solvent is removed to obtain a carboxylic acid-impregnated carbon black, and then a resin is added thereto.
- dry blending method A reactive group-containing monomer component constituting the resin to be coated and water are stirred at a high speed to prepare a suspension. After polymerization, the suspension is cooled to obtain a reactive group-containing resin from the polymer suspension.
- a method of adding carbon black and kneading, reacting carbon black with a reactive group (grafting carbon black), cooling and pulverizing, and the like can be employed.
- the type of resin to be coated is not particularly limited, but a synthetic resin is common, and a resin having a benzene ring in its structure has a stronger function as an amphoteric surfactant. From the viewpoints of stability and dispersion stability.
- Specific synthetic resins include thermosetting resins such as phenol resin, melamine resin, xylene resin, diallyl phthalate resin, glyphtal resin, epoxy resin, alkylbenzene resin, polystyrene, polycarbonate, polyethylene terephthalate, polybutylene terephthalate, modified polyphenylene.
- Thermoplastic resins such as oxide, polysulfone, polyparaphenylene terephthalamide, polyamide imide, polyimide, polyamino bismaleimide, polyether sulfopolyphenylene sulfone, polyarylate, and polyether ether ketone can be used.
- the coating amount of the resin on the carbon black is preferably 1 to 30% by mass with respect to the total amount of the carbon black and the resin, and there is a tendency that the coating can be made sufficiently by setting the amount to the lower limit value or more. On the other hand, by setting it to the upper limit value or less, there is a tendency that adhesion between resins can be prevented and dispersibility can be improved.
- the carbon black thus coated with a resin can be used as a light shielding material for a colored spacer according to a conventional method, and a color filter having this colored spacer as a constituent element can be prepared by a conventional method.
- a colored spacer having a high light shielding rate and a low surface reflectance can be achieved at a low cost. It is also presumed that by coating the carbon black surface with a resin, Ca and Na can be contained in the carbon black.
- an organic black pigment is used from the viewpoint of suppressing the decrease in the voltage holding ratio of the liquid crystal and controlling the shape and level difference by suppressing the absorption of ultraviolet rays.
- a compound represented by the following general formula (1) a geometric isomer of the compound, a salt of the compound, and a salt of the geometric isomer of the compound
- organic black pigment represented by the general formula (1) it is preferable to use one organic black pigment (hereinafter sometimes abbreviated as “organic black pigment represented by the general formula (1)”).
- R 11 and R 16 are each independently a hydrogen atom, CH 3 , CF 3 , a fluorine atom or a chlorine atom;
- the geometric isomer of the compound represented by the general formula (1) has the following core structure (however, the substituents in the structural formula are omitted), and the trans-trans isomer is probably the most stable. is there.
- the compound represented by general formula (1) When the compound represented by general formula (1) is anionic, its charge can be any known suitable cation, such as a metal, organic, inorganic or metal organic cation, specifically an alkali metal, alkaline earth metal.
- the geometric isomer of the compound represented by the general formula (1) is anionic, it is preferably a similar salt.
- R 12 , R 14 , R 15 , R 17 , R 19 and R 20 are preferably each independently a hydrogen atom, a fluorine atom or a chlorine atom, more preferably a hydrogen atom.
- R 13 and R 18 are preferably independently of each other a hydrogen atom, NO 2 , OCH 3 , OC 2 H 5 , bromine atom, chlorine atom, CH 3 , C 2 H 5 , N (CH 3 ) 2 , N (CH 3) (C 2 H 5) , N (C 2 H 5) 2, ⁇ - naphthyl, beta-naphthyl, SO 3 H or SO 3 - and is, more preferably a hydrogen atom or SO 3 H.
- R 11 and R 16 independently of one another are preferably hydrogen, CH 3 or CF 3, more preferably a hydrogen atom.
- at least one combination selected from the group consisting of R 11 and R 16 , R 12 and R 17 , R 13 and R 18 , R 14 and R 19 , and R 15 and R 20 is the same, and more preferably R 11 is the same as R 16 ;
- R 12 is the same as R 17 ;
- R 13 is the same as R 18 ;
- R 14 is the same as R 19 ;
- R 15 is the same as R 20 Are the same.
- alkyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms examples include methyl group, ethyl group, n-propyl group, isopropyl group, n-butyl group, sec-butyl group, isobutyl group, tert-butyl group, 2-methylbutyl group, n- Pentyl group, 2-pentyl group, 3-pentyl group, 2,2-dimethylpropyl group, n-hexyl group, heptyl group, n-octyl group, 1,1,3,3-tetramethylbutyl group, 2-ethylhexyl Group, nonyl group, decyl group, undecyl group or dodecyl group.
- Examples of the cycloalkyl group having 3 to 12 carbon atoms include cyclopropyl group, cyclopropylmethyl group, cyclobutyl group, cyclopentyl group, cyclohexyl group, cyclohexylmethyl group, trimethylcyclohexyl group, tuzyl group, norbornyl group, bornyl group, norcaryl group. , Caryl group, menthyl group, norpinyl group, pinyl group, 1-adamantyl group or 2-adamantyl group.
- alkenyl group having 2 to 12 carbon atoms examples include vinyl group, allyl group, 2-propen-2-yl group, 2-buten-1-yl group, 3-buten-1-yl group, and 1,3-butadiene.
- Examples of the cycloalkenyl group having 3 to 12 carbon atoms include a 2-cyclobuten-1-yl group, a 2-cyclopenten-1-yl group, a 2-cyclohexen-1-yl group, a 3-cyclohexen-1-yl group, , 4-Cyclohexadien-1-yl group, 1-p-menten-8-yl group, 4 (10) -tgen-10-yl group, 2-norbornen-1-yl group, 2,5-norbornadiene-1 -Yl group, 7,7-dimethyl-2,4-norcaradien-3-yl group or camphenyl group.
- alkynyl group having 2 to 12 carbon atoms examples include 1-propyn-3-yl group, 1-butyn-4-yl group, 1-pentyn-5-yl group, and 2-methyl-3-butyn-2-yl.
- the halogen atom is, for example, a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom or an iodine atom.
- the organic black pigment represented by the general formula (1) is preferably a compound represented by the following general formula (2).
- organic black pigments include Irgaphor (registered trademark) Black S 0100 CF (manufactured by BASF) under the trade name.
- This organic black pigment is preferably used after being dispersed by a dispersant, a solvent and a method described later.
- dispersibility and storage stability may be improved.
- Examples of the black color material other than the organic black pigment represented by the general formula (1) include acetylene black, lamp black, bone black, graphite, iron black, aniline black, cyanine black, titanium black, and perylene black. .
- dyes may be used.
- the dye that can be used as the colorant include azo dyes, anthraquinone dyes, phthalocyanine dyes, quinoneimine dyes, quinoline dyes, nitro dyes, carbonyl dyes, and methine dyes.
- the azo dye include C.I. I. Acid Yellow 11, C.I. I. Acid Orange 7, C.I. I. Acid Red 37, C.I. I. Acid Red 180, C.I. I. Acid Blue 29, C.I. I. Direct Red 28, C.I. I. Direct Red 83, C.I. I. Direct Yellow 12, C.I. I. Direct Orange 26, C.I. I. Direct Green 28, C.I. I.
- Direct Green 59 C.I. I. Reactive Yellow 2, C.I. I. Reactive Red 17, C.I. I. Reactive Red 120, C.I. I. Reactive Black 5, C.I. I. Disperse Orange 5, C.I. I. Disperse thread 58, C.I. I. Disperse blue 165, C.I. I. Basic Blue 41, C.I. I. Basic Red 18, C.I. I. Molded Red 7, C.I. I. Moldant Yellow 5, C.I. I. Examples thereof include Moldant Black 7.
- anthraquinone dyes examples include C.I. I. Bat Blue 4, C.I. I. Acid Blue 40, C.I. I. Acid Green 25, C.I. I. Reactive Blue 19, C.I. I. Reactive Blue 49, C.I. I. Disperse thread 60, C.I. I. Disperse Blue 56, C.I. I. Disperse Blue 60 etc. are mentioned.
- Other examples of the phthalocyanine dye include C.I. I. Pad Blue 5 and the like are quinone imine dyes such as C.I. I. Basic Blue 3, C.I. I. Basic Blue 9 and the like are quinoline dyes such as C.I. I. Solvent Yellow 33, C.I. I. Acid Yellow 3, C.I. I. Disperse Yellow 64 and the like are nitro dyes such as C.I. I. Acid Yellow 1, C.I. I. Acid Orange 3, C.I. I. Disperse Yellow 42 and the like.
- the average particle size of the pigment is usually 1 ⁇ m or less, preferably 0.5 ⁇ m or less, more preferably 0.25 ⁇ m or less.
- the standard of the average particle diameter is the number of pigment particles.
- the average particle diameter of the pigment is a value obtained from the pigment particle diameter measured by dynamic light scattering (DLS).
- the particle size is measured by fully diluting the photosensitive coloring composition (usually diluted to a pigment concentration of about 0.005 to 0.2% by mass. However, if there is a concentration recommended by the measuring instrument, According to concentration) and measured at 25 ° C.
- the (a) colorant used in the photosensitive coloring composition according to the second aspect is at least one selected from the group consisting of a red pigment and an orange pigment, and at least one selected from the group consisting of a blue pigment and a violet pigment. Containing.
- the photosensitive coloring composition which concerns on the 2nd aspect of this invention can achieve high light-shielding property by containing the combination of a specific organic coloring pigment.
- the same pigments as those described in the first embodiment can be preferably used.
- the combination of colors is not particularly limited, but from the viewpoint of light shielding properties, for example, a combination of a red pigment and a blue pigment, a combination of an orange pigment and a blue pigment, a combination of an orange pigment, a blue pigment, and a purple pigment.
- the photosensitive coloring composition according to the second embodiment may contain a pigment other than a red pigment, an orange pigment, a blue pigment and a violet pigment, and preferably contains a black color material from the viewpoint of light shielding properties. .
- the black color material the same materials as those described in the first embodiment can be suitably used.
- the photosensitive coloring composition according to the third aspect is a photosensitive coloring composition for forming a colored spacer, and (a) the colorant is not particularly limited.
- the colorant is not particularly limited.
- what contains at least any one of the above-mentioned organic coloring pigment, a black color material, and dye is mentioned.
- a coloring agent what was described as a 1st aspect and a 2nd aspect can also be used, and the organic black pigment represented by the said General formula (1) from a light-shielding viewpoint can be used. Coloring agents can also be used.
- the (b) alkali-soluble resin used in the present invention is a resin containing a carboxyl group or a hydroxyl group, and in particular, (b-I) an epoxy (meth) acrylate resin and (b-II) an ethylenically unsaturated bond in the side chain.
- a (meth) acrylic copolymer resin containing a repeating unit ⁇ having an unsaturated carboxylic acid-derived repeating unit ⁇ , and the content ratio of the repeating unit ⁇ in the (b-II) (meth) acrylic copolymer resin Is 10 mol% or more, preferably 12 mol% or more.
- the resin When the (bI) epoxy (meth) acrylate resin is used alone as the alkali-soluble resin, the resin generally has an aromatic structure or the like in the main chain. Heat flow is likely to occur, wrinkles are likely to occur, and surface smoothness is likely to deteriorate. Since the light-shielding property is also reduced by wrinkles, the desired light-shielding property cannot be obtained and problems such as light leakage tend to occur.
- the colored spacer is often used with a higher film thickness than the black matrix. Further, in order to provide a desired level difference, it is desirable that the photosensitive coloring composition has a coating characteristic that is difficult to be thermally deformed. However, in order to ensure compression characteristics or reliability, the pigment concentration is set lower than that of the black matrix.
- the difference in crosslink density between the vicinity of the film surface and the vicinity of the film bottom is further increased, and wrinkles are likely to occur. Moreover, there is a tendency that sufficient step forming property cannot be ensured due to such thermal deformation.
- the main chain contains an acrylic resin that does not contain an aromatic ring or the like and has little heat shrinkage, and particularly contains a repeating unit derived from an unsaturated carboxylic acid that has a high glass transition temperature and is difficult to heat flow.
- a specific (meth) acrylic copolymer resin it is considered that the heat flow can be reduced, the generation of wrinkles can be suppressed, and the surface smoothness can be improved.
- a (meth) acrylic copolymer resin with low sensitivity is used in combination, the reliability tends to deteriorate.
- Epoxy (meth) acrylate resin comprises a reaction product of an epoxy compound and an ⁇ , ⁇ -unsaturated monocarboxylic acid and / or an ⁇ , ⁇ -unsaturated monocarboxylic acid ester having a carboxyl group in the ester moiety; It is a resin obtained by further reacting a hydroxyl group produced by the reaction with a compound having two or more substituents capable of reacting with a hydroxyl group such as a polybasic acid and / or an anhydride thereof.
- Examples of the (bI) epoxy (meth) acrylate resin used in the present invention include the following epoxy (meth) acrylate resin (b1) and / or epoxy (meth) acrylate resin (b2) (hereinafter referred to as “carboxyl group-containing epoxy (meth) )) Acrylate resin ”is sometimes used from the viewpoint of reliability.
- ⁇ Epoxy (meth) acrylate resin (b2)> An ⁇ , ⁇ -unsaturated monocarboxylic acid or an ⁇ , ⁇ -unsaturated monocarboxylic acid ester having a carboxyl group is added to an epoxy resin, and further reacted with a polyhydric alcohol and a polybasic acid and / or an anhydride thereof. The alkali-soluble resin obtained by this.
- the epoxy resin includes the raw material compound before the resin is formed by thermosetting, and the epoxy resin can be appropriately selected from known epoxy resins. Moreover, the epoxy resin can use the compound obtained by making a phenolic compound and epihalohydrin react.
- the phenolic compound is preferably a compound having a divalent or divalent or higher phenolic hydroxyl group, and may be a monomer or a polymer.
- the types of epoxy resins used as raw materials are cresol novolac type epoxy resins, phenol novolac type epoxy resins, bisphenol A type epoxy resins, bisphenol F type epoxy resins, trisphenol methane type epoxy resins, biphenyl novolac type epoxy resins, naphthalene novolak type
- An epoxy resin, an epoxy resin that is a reaction product of a polyaddition reaction product of dicyclopentadiene and phenol or cresol and an epihalohydrin, an adamantyl group-containing epoxy resin, a fluorene type epoxy resin, and the like can be suitably used. Those having an aromatic ring in the main chain can be suitably used.
- epoxy resin examples include bisphenol A type epoxy resin (for example, “Epicoat (registered trademark), 828”, “Epicoat 1001”, “Epicoat 1002”, “Epicoat 1004” manufactured by Mitsubishi Chemical Corporation). Etc.), epoxy obtained by reaction of alcoholic hydroxyl group of bisphenol A type epoxy resin and epichlorohydrin (for example, “NER-1302” manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.
- NC-3000 and epoxy resin represented by the following general formula (B4) include“ ESF-300 ”manufactured by Nippon Steel & Sumikin Chemical Co., Ltd.
- a represents an average value and represents a number from 0 to 10.
- R 111 represents any of a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, a cycloalkyl group having 3 to 10 carbon atoms, a phenyl group, a naphthyl group, and a biphenyl group.
- a plurality of R 111 present in one molecule may be the same or different.
- R 121 represents any one of a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, a cycloalkyl group having 3 to 10 carbon atoms, a phenyl group, a naphthyl group, and a biphenyl group.
- a plurality of R 121 present in one molecule may be the same or different.
- X represents a linking group represented by the following general formula (B3-1) or (B3-2). However, one or more adamantane structures are included in the molecular structure.
- c represents an integer of 2 or 3.
- R 131 to R 134 and R 135 to R 137 are each independently an adamantyl group, a hydrogen atom, or a substituent, which may have a substituent. And an alkyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms which may have a phenyl group which may have a substituent. * Indicates a bond.
- p and q each independently represent an integer of 0 to 4, it represents an alkyl group or a halogen atom
- R 141 and R 142 carbon atoms are each independently 1-4.
- R 143 and R 144 each independently represents an alkylene group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
- x and y each independently represents an integer of 0 or more.
- an epoxy resin represented by any one of the general formulas (B1) to (B4) is preferable to use.
- Examples of ⁇ , ⁇ -unsaturated monocarboxylic acid or ⁇ , ⁇ -unsaturated monocarboxylic acid ester having a carboxyl group include (meth) acrylic acid, crotonic acid, o-, m- or p-vinylbenzoic acid, (meta ) Monocarboxylic acid such as ⁇ -position haloalkyl, alkoxyl, halogen, nitro, cyano substituent of acrylic acid, 2- (meth) acryloyloxyethyl succinic acid, 2- (meth) acryloyloxyethyl adipic acid, 2- ( (Meth) acryloyloxyethyl phthalic acid, 2- (meth) acryloyloxyethyl hexahydrophthalic acid, 2- (meth) acryloyloxyethyl maleic acid, 2- (meth) acryloyloxypropyl succinic acid, 2- (Meth) acryl
- an ⁇ , ⁇ -unsaturated monocarboxylic acid or an ⁇ , ⁇ -unsaturated monocarboxylic acid ester having a carboxyl group can be used as a method for adding an ⁇ , ⁇ -unsaturated monocarboxylic acid or an ⁇ , ⁇ -unsaturated monocarboxylic acid ester having a carboxyl group.
- a known method can be used as a method for adding an ⁇ , ⁇ -unsaturated monocarboxylic acid or an ⁇ , ⁇ -unsaturated monocarboxylic acid ester having a carboxyl group.
- an epoxy resin at a temperature of 50 to 150 ° C. in the presence of an esterification catalyst. it can.
- esterification catalyst used here tertiary amines such as triethylamine, trimethylamine, benzyldimethylamine, and benzyldiethylamine, quaternary ammonium salts such as tetramethylammonium chloride, tetraethylammonium chloride, dodecyltrimethylammonium chloride, and the like can be used. .
- the epoxy resin, ⁇ , ⁇ -unsaturated monocarboxylic acid or ⁇ , ⁇ -unsaturated monocarboxylic acid ester having a carboxyl group, and esterification catalyst may be used alone or in combination of two types. You may use the above together.
- the amount of ⁇ , ⁇ -unsaturated monocarboxylic acid or ⁇ , ⁇ -unsaturated monocarboxylic acid ester having a carboxyl group is preferably in the range of 0.5 to 1.2 equivalents relative to 1 equivalent of epoxy group of the epoxy resin. More preferably, it is in the range of 0.7 to 1.1 equivalents.
- the amount is not less than the lower limit, the amount of unsaturated groups introduced is sufficient, and the subsequent reaction with the polybasic acid and / or anhydride thereof tends to be sufficient.
- the amount is not more than the above upper limit value, ⁇ , ⁇ -unsaturated monocarboxylic acid or ⁇ , ⁇ -unsaturated monocarboxylic acid ester having a carboxyl group tends to be suppressed from remaining as an unreacted product.
- Polybasic acids and / or anhydrides thereof include maleic acid, succinic acid, itaconic acid, phthalic acid, tetrahydrophthalic acid, hexahydrophthalic acid, pyromellitic acid, trimellitic acid, benzophenone tetracarboxylic acid, methyl hexahydrophthal
- examples thereof include one or more selected from acids, endomethylenetetrahydrophthalic acid, chlorendic acid, methyltetrahydrophthalic acid, biphenyltetracarboxylic acid, and anhydrides thereof.
- maleic acid succinic acid, itaconic acid, phthalic acid, tetrahydrophthalic acid, hexahydrophthalic acid, pyromellitic acid, trimellitic acid, biphenyltetracarboxylic acid, or anhydrides thereof.
- Particularly preferred is tetrahydrophthalic acid, biphenyltetracarboxylic acid, tetrahydrophthalic anhydride, or biphenyltetracarboxylic dianhydride.
- a known method can be used for addition reaction of polybasic acid and / or anhydride thereof, and ⁇ , ⁇ -unsaturated monocarboxylic acid or ⁇ , ⁇ -unsaturated monocarboxylic acid having a carboxyl group to epoxy resin.
- the target product can be obtained by continuing the reaction under the same conditions as in the ester addition reaction.
- the addition amount of the polybasic acid and / or its anhydride component is preferably such that the acid value of the resulting carboxyl group-containing epoxy (meth) acrylate resin is in the range of 10 to 150 mgKOH / g, and further 20
- the degree is preferably in the range of ⁇ 140 mgKOH / g.
- the carboxyl group-containing epoxy (meth) acrylate resin is usually a polybasic acid and a reaction product of an epoxy resin and an ⁇ , ⁇ -unsaturated monocarboxylic acid or an ⁇ , ⁇ -unsaturated monocarboxylic acid ester having a carboxyl group.
- the mixing order of the polybasic acid and / or its anhydride and the polyfunctional alcohol is not particularly limited. Any hydroxyl group present in the mixture of the reaction product of the epoxy resin with the ⁇ , ⁇ -unsaturated monocarboxylic acid or the ⁇ , ⁇ -unsaturated monocarboxylic acid ester having a carboxyl group and the polyfunctional alcohol by heating.
- the polybasic acid and / or its anhydride Any hydroxyl group present in the mixture of the reaction product of the epoxy resin with the ⁇ , ⁇ -unsaturated monocarboxylic acid or the ⁇ , ⁇ -unsaturated monocarboxylic acid ester having a carboxyl group and the polyfunctional alcohol by heating.
- the chemical structure of the repeating unit contained in the carboxyl group-containing epoxy (meth) acrylate resin is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include the following chemical structures.
- R 11 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group
- Y represents a residue of a hydrogen atom or a polybasic acid.
- polybasic acids may be crosslinked with each other.
- Examples of the carboxyl group-containing epoxy (meth) acrylate resin include those described in Korean Patent Publication No. 10-2013-0022955 in addition to the above-mentioned ones.
- the weight average molecular weight (Mw) in terms of polystyrene measured by gel permeation chromatography (GPC) of the epoxy (meth) acrylate resin is usually 1000 or more, preferably 2000 or more, more preferably 3000 or more, still more preferably 4000 or more, Particularly preferably, it is 5000 or more, usually 10,000 or less, preferably 8000 or less, more preferably 7000 or less. When it is at least the lower limit value, the reliability tends to be improved, and when it is at most the upper limit value, the solubility tends to be good.
- the acid value of the epoxy (meth) acrylate resin is not particularly limited, but is preferably 10 mg ⁇ KOH / g or more, more preferably 20 mg ⁇ KOH / g or more, further preferably 40 mg ⁇ KOH / g or more, and 60 mg ⁇ KOH / g or more. Is more preferably 80 mg ⁇ KOH / g or more, preferably 200 mg ⁇ KOH / g or less, more preferably 150 mg ⁇ KOH / g or less, still more preferably 120 mg ⁇ KOH / g or less, and 100 mg ⁇ KOH / g or less. Particularly preferred is g or less. When the amount is not less than the lower limit value, moderate development solubility tends to be obtained, and when the value is not more than the upper limit value, the development tends to be excessive and the film dissolution tends to be suppressed.
- the chemical structure of the epoxy (meth) acrylate resin is not particularly limited.
- an epoxy (meth) acrylate resin having a repeating unit structure represented by the following general formula (bII) hereinafter, “ (May be abbreviated as “(bII) epoxy (meth) acrylate resin”) and / or an epoxy (meth) acrylate resin having a partial structure represented by the following general formula (bII-II) ( Hereinafter, it is preferable to contain “(b-II-II) epoxy (meth) acrylate resin”.
- R 11 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group
- R 12 represents a divalent hydrocarbon group which may have a substituent.
- the benzene ring in formula (bII) may be further substituted with an arbitrary substituent. * Represents a bond.
- each R 13 independently represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
- R 14 represents a divalent hydrocarbon group having a cyclic hydrocarbon group as a side chain.
- R 15 and R 16 each independently represents a divalent aliphatic group which may have a substituent.
- m and n each independently represents an integer of 0 to 2. * Represents a bond.
- R 11 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group
- R 12 represents a divalent hydrocarbon group which may have a substituent.
- the benzene ring in formula (bII) may be further substituted with an arbitrary substituent. * Represents a bond.
- R 12 represents a divalent hydrocarbon group which may have a substituent.
- the divalent hydrocarbon group include a divalent aliphatic group, a divalent aromatic ring group, a group in which one or more divalent aliphatic groups are linked to one or more divalent aromatic ring groups. Can be mentioned.
- Examples of the divalent aliphatic group include linear, branched, and cyclic groups. Among these, a linear one is preferable from the viewpoint of development solubility, and a cyclic one is preferable from the viewpoint of reducing penetration of the developer into the exposed portion.
- the number of carbon atoms is usually 1 or more, preferably 3 or more, more preferably 6 or more, 20 or less, more preferably 15 or less, and even more preferably 10 or less.
- the amount is not less than the lower limit value, a strong film is easily obtained, surface roughness is unlikely to occur, and the adhesion to the substrate tends to be good. It is easy to suppress the film loss at the time, and the resolution tends to be improved.
- divalent linear aliphatic group examples include a methylene group, an ethylene group, an n-propylene group, an n-butylene group, an n-pentylene group, an n-hexylene group, and an n-heptylene group.
- a methylene group is preferable from the viewpoint of the rigidity of the skeleton.
- divalent branched aliphatic group examples include the divalent linear aliphatic group described above, and the side chain as a methyl group, an ethyl group, an n-propyl group, an iso-propyl group, an n-butyl group, an iso group.
- Examples include structures having a -butyl group, a sec-butyl group, a tert-butyl group, and the like.
- the number of rings that the divalent cyclic aliphatic group has is not particularly limited, but is usually 1 or more, preferably 2 or more, and usually 12 or less, preferably 10 or less.
- By setting the lower limit value or more a strong film tends to be obtained and the substrate adhesion tends to be good.
- By setting the upper limit value or less it is easy to suppress deterioration of sensitivity and film reduction during development, and resolution. Tend to improve.
- divalent cyclic aliphatic group examples include a cyclohexane ring, a cycloheptane ring, a cyclodecane ring, a cyclododecane ring, a norbornane ring, an isobornane ring, an adamantane ring, a cyclododecane ring, a dicyclopentadiene, and a hydrogen atom.
- a group in which two are removed Among these, a group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from a dicyclopentadiene ring or an adamantane ring is preferable from the viewpoint of skeleton rigidity.
- Examples of the substituent that the divalent aliphatic group may have include a hydroxyl group, a methyl group, an ethyl group, an n-propyl group, an iso-propyl group, an n-butyl group, a sec-butyl group, and a tert-butyl group.
- unsubstituted is preferable from the viewpoint of ease of synthesis.
- examples of the divalent aromatic ring group include a divalent aromatic hydrocarbon ring group and a divalent aromatic heterocyclic group.
- the number of carbon atoms is usually 4 or more, preferably 5 or more, more preferably 6 or more, 20 or less, more preferably 15 or less, and even more preferably 10 or less.
- the amount is not less than the lower limit value, a strong film is easily obtained, surface roughness is unlikely to occur, and the adhesion to the substrate tends to be good. It is easy to suppress the film loss at the time, and the resolution tends to be improved.
- the aromatic hydrocarbon ring in the divalent aromatic hydrocarbon ring group may be a single ring or a condensed ring.
- a benzene ring, naphthalene ring, anthracene having one free valence And groups such as a ring, phenanthrene ring, perylene ring, tetracene ring, pyrene ring, benzpyrene ring, chrysene ring, triphenylene ring, acenaphthene ring, fluoranthene ring, and fluorene ring.
- the aromatic heterocyclic ring in the aromatic heterocyclic group may be a monocyclic ring or a condensed ring.
- Examples of the substituent that the divalent aromatic ring group may have include a hydroxyl group, a methyl group, a methoxy group, an ethyl group, an ethoxy group, a propyl group, and a propoxy group.
- unsubstituted is preferable from the viewpoints of development solubility and moisture absorption resistance.
- divalent aliphatic groups and one or more divalent aromatic ring groups are linked
- one or more of the above divalent aliphatic groups and the above divalent aromatic group are used.
- the number of divalent aliphatic groups is not particularly limited, but is usually 1 or more, preferably 2 or more, usually 10 or less, preferably 5 or less, and more preferably 3 or less.
- the amount is not less than the lower limit value, a strong film is easily obtained, surface roughness is unlikely to occur, and the adhesion to the substrate tends to be good. It is easy to suppress the film loss at the time, and the resolution tends to be improved.
- the number of divalent aromatic ring groups is not particularly limited, but is usually 1 or more, preferably 2 or more, usually 10 or less, preferably 5 or less, and more preferably 3 or less.
- the amount is not less than the lower limit value, a strong film is easily obtained, surface roughness is unlikely to occur, and the adhesion to the substrate tends to be good. It is easy to suppress the film loss at the time, and the resolution tends to be improved.
- the benzene ring in the formula (bII) may be further substituted with an arbitrary substituent.
- substituents include a hydroxyl group, a methyl group, a methoxy group, an ethyl group, an ethoxy group, a propyl group, and a propoxy group.
- the number of substituents is not particularly limited, either one or two or more. Among these, unsubstituted is preferable from the viewpoint of patterning characteristics.
- repeating unit structure represented by the formula (bII) may be a repeating unit structure represented by the following formula (bII-1) from the viewpoint of simplicity of synthesis. preferable.
- R 11 and R 12 are as defined above for the formula (bII).
- R X represents a hydrogen atom or a polybasic acid residue. * Represents a bond.
- the benzene ring in the formula (bII-1) may be further substituted with an arbitrary substituent.
- the polybasic acid residue means a monovalent group obtained by removing one OH group from a polybasic acid or its anhydride.
- Polybasic acids include maleic acid, succinic acid, itaconic acid, phthalic acid, tetrahydrophthalic acid, hexahydrophthalic acid, pyromellitic acid, trimellitic acid, benzophenone tetracarboxylic acid, methylhexahydrophthalic acid, end methylenetetrahydrophthalic acid
- One type or two or more types selected from acids, chlorendic acid, methyltetrahydrophthalic acid, and biphenyltetracarboxylic acid may be mentioned.
- maleic acid, succinic acid, itaconic acid, phthalic acid, tetrahydrophthalic acid, hexahydrophthalic acid, pyromellitic acid, trimellitic acid, and biphenyltetracarboxylic acid are more preferable.
- tetrahydrophthalic acid, biphenyltetracarboxylic acid, tetrahydrophthalic acid, biphenyltetracarboxylic acid are more preferable.
- the repeating unit structure represented by the formula (bII-1) contained in one molecule of (bII) epoxy (meth) acrylate resin may be one type or two or more types.
- R X may be a hydrogen atom, and R X may be a polybasic acid residue.
- the number of repeating unit structures represented by the formula (bII) contained in one molecule of the (bII) epoxy (meth) acrylate resin is not particularly limited, but is preferably 1 or more. 3 or more is more preferable, 20 or less is preferable, and 15 or less is more preferable. It is easy to obtain a strong film by making the lower limit value or more, and there is a tendency that surface roughness is less likely to occur, and it is easy to suppress deterioration of sensitivity and film loss at the time of development by making the upper limit value or less. The resolution tends to improve.
- the polystyrene-converted weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the (bII) epoxy (meth) acrylate resin measured by gel permeation chromatography (GPC) is not particularly limited, but is preferably 1000 or more, more preferably 1500 or more.
- Mw weight average molecular weight
- 2000 or more is more preferable
- 3000 or more is more preferable
- 4000 or more is particularly preferable
- 5000 or more is most preferable
- 30000 or less is preferable
- 20000 or less is more preferable
- 10,000 or less is further preferable
- 8000 or less is particularly preferable.
- the acid value of the (bII) epoxy (meth) acrylate resin is not particularly limited, but is preferably 10 mgKOH / g or more, more preferably 20 mgKOH / g or more, further preferably 40 mgKOH / g or more, and 50 mgKOH / g or more. Is more preferable, 80 mgKOH / g or more is particularly preferable, 200 mgKOH / g or less is preferable, 150 mgKOH / g or less is more preferable, 130 mgKOH / g or less is more preferable, and 100 mgKOH / g or less is particularly preferable. When the amount is not less than the lower limit, the development solubility is improved and the resolution tends to be good, and when the amount is not more than the upper limit, the remaining film ratio of the photosensitive coloring composition tends to be good. There is.
- each R 13 independently represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
- R 14 represents a divalent hydrocarbon group having a cyclic hydrocarbon group as a side chain.
- R 15 and R 16 each independently represents a divalent aliphatic group which may have a substituent.
- m and n each independently represents an integer of 0 to 2. * Represents a bond.
- R 14 represents a divalent hydrocarbon group having a cyclic hydrocarbon group as a side chain.
- the cyclic hydrocarbon group include an aliphatic ring group and an aromatic ring group.
- the number of rings that the aliphatic ring group has is not particularly limited, but is usually 1 or more, preferably 2 or more, and usually 10 or less, preferably 5 or less, and more preferably 3 or less. It is easy to obtain a strong film by making the lower limit value or more, and there is a tendency that surface roughness is less likely to occur, and it is easy to suppress deterioration of sensitivity and film loss at the time of development by making the upper limit value or less. The resolution tends to improve.
- the number of carbon atoms in the aliphatic cyclic group is usually 4 or more, preferably 6 or more, more preferably 8 or more, preferably 40 or less, more preferably 30 or less, still more preferably 20 or less, and particularly preferably 15 or less. preferable.
- the aliphatic ring in the aliphatic ring group include a cyclohexane ring, a cycloheptane ring, a cyclodecane ring, a cyclododecane ring, a norbornane ring, an isobornane ring, an adamantane ring, and a cyclododecane ring.
- an adamantane ring is preferable from the viewpoint of the remaining film ratio and resolution of the photosensitive coloring composition.
- the number of rings of the aromatic ring group is not particularly limited, but is usually 1 or more, preferably 2 or more, more preferably 3 or more, and usually 10 or less, preferably 5 or less, preferably 4 or less. Is more preferable. It is easy to obtain a strong film by making the lower limit value or more, and there is a tendency that surface roughness is less likely to occur, and it is easy to suppress deterioration of sensitivity and film loss at the time of development by making the upper limit value or less. The resolution tends to improve.
- the aromatic ring group include an aromatic hydrocarbon ring group and an aromatic heterocyclic group.
- the number of carbon atoms in the aromatic ring group is usually 4 or more, preferably 6 or more, more preferably 8 or more, still more preferably 10 or more, particularly preferably 12 or more, and preferably 40 or less, preferably 30 or less. More preferably, it is more preferably 20 or less, and particularly preferably 15 or less.
- aromatic ring in the aromatic ring group examples include benzene ring, naphthalene ring, anthracene ring, phenanthrene ring, perylene ring, tetracene ring, pyrene ring, benzpyrene ring, chrysene ring, triphenylene ring, acenaphthene ring, fluoranthene ring, Examples include fluorene ring. Among these, a fluorene ring is preferable from the viewpoint of patterning characteristics.
- the divalent hydrocarbon group in the divalent hydrocarbon group having a cyclic hydrocarbon group as a side chain is not particularly limited.
- Examples of the divalent aliphatic group include linear, branched, and cyclic groups. Among these, a linear one is preferable from the viewpoint of development solubility, and a cyclic one is preferable from the viewpoint of reducing penetration of the developer into the exposed portion.
- the number of carbon atoms is usually 1 or more, preferably 3 or more, more preferably 6 or more, 25 or less, more preferably 20 or less, and even more preferably 15 or less.
- the amount is not less than the lower limit value, a strong film is easily obtained, surface roughness is unlikely to occur, and the adhesion to the substrate tends to be good. It is easy to suppress the film loss at the time, and the resolution tends to be improved.
- divalent linear aliphatic group examples include a methylene group, an ethylene group, an n-propylene group, an n-butylene group, an n-pentylene group, an n-hexylene group, and an n-heptylene group.
- a methylene group is preferable from the viewpoint of the rigidity of the skeleton.
- divalent branched aliphatic group examples include the divalent linear aliphatic group described above, and the side chain as a methyl group, an ethyl group, an n-propyl group, an iso-propyl group, an n-butyl group, an iso group.
- Examples include structures having a -butyl group, a sec-butyl group, a tert-butyl group, and the like.
- the number of rings of the divalent cyclic aliphatic group is not particularly limited, but is usually 1 or more, preferably 2 or more, and usually 10 or less, preferably 5 or less, and more preferably 3 or less.
- the value is not less than the lower limit value, a strong film tends to be obtained and the substrate adhesion tends to be good.
- the value is not more than the upper limit value, it is easy to suppress deterioration of sensitivity and film loss during development, and resolution. Tend to improve.
- divalent aliphatic group examples include a cyclohexane ring, a cycloheptane ring, a cyclodecane ring, a cyclododecane ring, a norbornane ring, an isobornane ring, an adamantane ring, a cyclododecane ring, and the like, by removing two hydrogen atoms.
- a group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from the adamantane ring is preferable from the viewpoint of the rigidity of the skeleton.
- Examples of the substituent that the divalent aliphatic group may have include a hydroxyl group, a methyl group, an ethyl group, an n-propyl group, an iso-propyl group, an n-butyl group, a sec-butyl group, and a tert-butyl group.
- unsubstituted is preferable from the viewpoint of ease of synthesis.
- examples of the divalent aromatic ring group include a divalent aromatic hydrocarbon ring group and a divalent aromatic heterocyclic group.
- the carbon number is usually 4 or more, preferably 5 or more, more preferably 6 or more, 30 or less, more preferably 20 or less, and even more preferably 15 or less.
- the amount is not less than the lower limit value, a strong film is easily obtained, surface roughness is unlikely to occur, and the adhesion to the substrate tends to be good. It is easy to suppress the film loss at the time, and the resolution tends to be improved.
- the aromatic hydrocarbon ring in the divalent aromatic hydrocarbon ring group may be a single ring or a condensed ring.
- a benzene ring, naphthalene ring, anthracene having one free valence And groups such as a ring, phenanthrene ring, perylene ring, tetracene ring, pyrene ring, benzpyrene ring, chrysene ring, triphenylene ring, acenaphthene ring, fluoranthene ring, and fluorene ring.
- the aromatic heterocyclic ring in the aromatic heterocyclic group may be a monocyclic ring or a condensed ring.
- Examples of the substituent that the divalent aromatic ring group may have include a hydroxyl group, a methyl group, a methoxy group, an ethyl group, an ethoxy group, a propyl group, and a propoxy group. Among these, unsubstituted is preferable from the viewpoint of development solubility.
- divalent aliphatic groups and one or more divalent aromatic ring groups are linked
- one or more of the above divalent aliphatic groups and the above divalent aromatic group are used.
- the number of divalent aliphatic groups is not particularly limited, but is usually 1 or more, preferably 2 or more, usually 10 or less, preferably 5 or less, and more preferably 3 or less.
- the amount is not less than the lower limit value, a strong film is easily obtained, surface roughness is unlikely to occur, and the adhesion to the substrate tends to be good. It is easy to suppress the film loss at the time, and the resolution tends to be improved.
- the number of divalent aromatic ring groups is not particularly limited, but is usually 1 or more, preferably 2 or more, usually 10 or less, preferably 5 or less, and more preferably 3 or less.
- the amount is not less than the lower limit value, a strong film is easily obtained, surface roughness is unlikely to occur, and the adhesion to the substrate tends to be good. It is easy to suppress the film loss at the time, and the resolution tends to be improved.
- the group in which one or more divalent aliphatic groups and one or more divalent aromatic ring groups are linked include those represented by the above formulas (bIIA) to (bIII). And the group represented by F).
- the group represented by the formula (bIIC) is preferable from the viewpoint of the rigidity of the skeleton and the hydrophobicity of the film.
- the bonding mode of the cyclic hydrocarbon group which is a side chain with respect to these divalent hydrocarbon groups is not particularly limited. For example, one hydrogen atom of an aliphatic group or an aromatic ring group is substituted with the side chain. And a mode in which a cyclic hydrocarbon group which is a side chain including one of the carbon atoms of the aliphatic group is formed.
- R 15 and R 16 each independently represents a divalent aliphatic group which may have a substituent.
- Examples of the divalent aliphatic group include linear, branched, and cyclic groups. Among these, a linear one is preferable from the viewpoint of development solubility, and a cyclic one is preferable from the viewpoint of reducing penetration of the developer into the exposed portion.
- the number of carbon atoms is usually 1 or more, preferably 3 or more, more preferably 6 or more, 20 or less, more preferably 15 or less, and even more preferably 10 or less.
- the amount is not less than the lower limit value, a strong film is easily obtained, surface roughness is unlikely to occur, and the adhesion to the substrate tends to be good. It is easy to suppress the film loss at the time, and the resolution tends to be improved.
- divalent linear aliphatic group examples include a methylene group, an ethylene group, an n-propylene group, an n-butylene group, an n-pentylene group, an n-hexylene group, and an n-heptylene group.
- a methylene group is preferable from the viewpoint of the rigidity of the skeleton.
- divalent branched aliphatic group examples include the divalent linear aliphatic group described above, and the side chain as a methyl group, an ethyl group, an n-propyl group, an iso-propyl group, an n-butyl group, an iso group.
- Examples include structures having a -butyl group, a sec-butyl group, a tert-butyl group, and the like.
- the number of rings that the divalent cyclic aliphatic group has is not particularly limited, but is usually 1 or more, preferably 2 or more, and usually 12 or less, preferably 10 or less.
- By setting the lower limit value or more a strong film tends to be obtained and the substrate adhesion tends to be good.
- By setting the upper limit value or less it is easy to suppress deterioration of sensitivity and film reduction during development, and resolution. Tend to improve.
- divalent cyclic aliphatic group examples include a cyclohexane ring, a cycloheptane ring, a cyclodecane ring, a cyclododecane ring, a norbornane ring, an isobornane ring, an adamantane ring, a cyclododecane ring, a dicyclopentadiene, and a hydrogen atom.
- a group in which two are removed Among these, a group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from a dicyclopentadiene ring or an adamantane ring is preferable from the viewpoint of skeleton rigidity.
- Examples of the substituent that the divalent aliphatic group may have include a hydroxyl group, a methyl group, an ethyl group, an n-propyl group, an iso-propyl group, an n-butyl group, a sec-butyl group, and a tert-butyl group.
- unsubstituted is preferable from the viewpoint of ease of synthesis.
- M, n In the general formula (bI-II), m and n each represents an integer of 0-2. When it is at least the lower limit, patterning suitability is good and surface roughness tends to be less likely to occur, and when it is at most the upper limit, developability tends to be good. M and n are preferably 0 from the viewpoint of developability, and m and n are preferably 1 or more from the viewpoint of patterning suitability and surface roughness.
- partial structure represented by the general formula (b-I-II) is a partial structure represented by the following general formula (b-II-II-1) from the viewpoint of adhesion to the substrate. Is preferred.
- R 13 , R 15 , R 16 , m and n are as defined in the formula (bI-II).
- R ⁇ represents a monovalent cyclic hydrocarbon group which may have a substituent.
- p is an integer of 1 or more.
- the benzene ring in formula (bI-II-1) may be further substituted with an arbitrary substituent. * Represents a bond.
- R ⁇ represents a monovalent cyclic hydrocarbon group which may have a substituent.
- the cyclic hydrocarbon group include an aliphatic ring group and an aromatic ring group.
- the number of rings that the aliphatic ring group has is not particularly limited, but is usually 1 or more, preferably 2 or more, and usually 6 or less, preferably 4 or less, more preferably 3 or less. By setting it to the lower limit value or more, a strong film is likely to be obtained and surface roughness tends to be less likely to occur, and by setting the upper limit value or less, patterning characteristics tend to be good.
- the number of carbon atoms in the aliphatic cyclic group is usually 4 or more, preferably 6 or more, more preferably 8 or more, preferably 40 or less, more preferably 30 or less, still more preferably 20 or less, and particularly preferably 15 or less. preferable.
- aliphatic ring in the aliphatic ring group include a cyclohexane ring, a cycloheptane ring, a cyclodecane ring, a cyclododecane ring, a norbornane ring, an isobornane ring, an adamantane ring, and a cyclododecane ring.
- an adamantane ring is preferable from the viewpoint of strong film characteristics.
- the number of rings of the aromatic ring group is not particularly limited, but is usually 1 or more, preferably 2 or more, more preferably 3 or more, and usually 10 or less, preferably 5 or less.
- the aromatic ring group include an aromatic hydrocarbon ring group and an aromatic heterocyclic group.
- the number of carbon atoms in the aromatic ring group is usually 4 or more, preferably 5 or more, more preferably 6 or more, 30 or less, more preferably 20 or less, and even more preferably 15 or less.
- the aromatic ring in the aromatic ring group include a benzene ring, a naphthalene ring, an anthracene ring, a phenanthrene ring, and a fluorene ring.
- a fluorene ring is preferable from the viewpoint of development solubility.
- Examples of the substituent that the cyclic hydrocarbon group may have include a hydroxyl group, a methyl group, an ethyl group, an n-propyl group, an iso-propyl group, an n-butyl group, a sec-butyl group, a tert-butyl group, Examples thereof include alkyl groups having 1 to 5 carbon atoms such as amyl group and iso-amyl group; alkoxy groups having 1 to 5 carbon atoms such as methoxy group and ethoxy group; hydroxyl group; nitro group; cyano group; Among these, unsubstituted is preferable from the viewpoint of ease of synthesis.
- P represents an integer of 1 or more, preferably 2 or more, and more preferably 3 or less.
- R ⁇ is preferably a monovalent aliphatic ring group, and more preferably an adamantyl group.
- the benzene ring in formula (bI-II-1) may be further substituted with an arbitrary substituent.
- substituents include a hydroxyl group, a methyl group, a methoxy group, an ethyl group, an ethoxy group, a propyl group, and a propoxy group.
- the number of substituents is not particularly limited, either one or two or more. Among these, unsubstituted is preferable from the viewpoint of patterning characteristics.
- the partial structure represented by the general formula (b-II-II) is a moiety represented by the following general formula (b-II-II-2) from the viewpoint of skeleton rigidity and membrane hydrophobization. A structure is preferred.
- R 13 , R 15 , R 16 , m and n are as defined above in the formula (bI-II).
- R ⁇ represents a divalent cyclic hydrocarbon group which may have a substituent.
- the benzene ring in formula (bI-II-2) may be further substituted with an arbitrary substituent. * Represents a bond.
- R ⁇ represents a divalent cyclic hydrocarbon group which may have a substituent.
- the cyclic hydrocarbon group include an aliphatic ring group and an aromatic ring group.
- the number of rings that the aliphatic ring group has is not particularly limited, but is usually 1 or more, preferably 2 or more, and usually 10 or less, preferably 5 or less. It is easy to obtain a strong film by making the lower limit value or more, and there is a tendency that surface roughness is less likely to occur, and it is easy to suppress deterioration of sensitivity and film loss at the time of development by making the upper limit value or less. The resolution tends to improve. Moreover, carbon number of an aliphatic cyclic group is 4 or more normally, 6 or more are preferable, 8 or more are more preferable, 40 or less are preferable, 35 or less are more preferable, and 30 or less are more preferable.
- the aliphatic ring in the aliphatic ring group include a cyclohexane ring, a cycloheptane ring, a cyclodecane ring, a cyclododecane ring, a norbornane ring, an isobornane ring, an adamantane ring, and a cyclododecane ring.
- an adamantane ring is preferable from the viewpoint of storage stability.
- the number of rings of the aromatic ring group is not particularly limited, but is usually 1 or more, preferably 2 or more, more preferably 3 or more, and usually 10 or less, preferably 5 or less.
- the lower limit value or more By setting the lower limit value or more, a strong film is likely to be obtained, and there is a tendency that surface roughness is less likely to occur, and by setting the upper limit value or less, it is easy to suppress deterioration of sensitivity and film loss, and resolution. Tend to improve.
- the aromatic ring group include an aromatic hydrocarbon ring group and an aromatic heterocyclic group.
- the carbon number of the aromatic ring group is usually 4 or more, preferably 6 or more, more preferably 8 or more, further preferably 10 or more, more preferably 40 or less, more preferably 30 or less, and further preferably 20 or less. Preferably, 15 or less is particularly preferable.
- aromatic ring in the aromatic ring group examples include a benzene ring, a naphthalene ring, an anthracene ring, a phenanthrene ring, and a fluorene ring.
- a fluorene ring is preferable from the viewpoint of developability.
- Examples of the substituent that the cyclic hydrocarbon group may have include a hydroxyl group, a methyl group, an ethyl group, an n-propyl group, an iso-propyl group, an n-butyl group, a sec-butyl group, a tert-butyl group, Examples thereof include alkyl groups having 1 to 5 carbon atoms such as amyl group and iso-amyl group; alkoxy groups having 1 to 5 carbon atoms such as methoxy group and ethoxy group; hydroxyl group; nitro group; cyano group; Among these, unsubstituted is preferable from the viewpoint of simplicity of synthesis.
- R beta is a divalent aliphatic cyclic group, and more preferably a divalent adamantane ring group.
- R beta is a divalent aromatic ring group, and more preferably a divalent fluorene ring group.
- the benzene ring in formula (bI-II-2) may be further substituted with an arbitrary substituent.
- substituents include a hydroxyl group, a methyl group, a methoxy group, an ethyl group, an ethoxy group, a propyl group, and a propoxy group.
- the number of substituents is not particularly limited, either one or two or more.
- two benzene rings may be connected via a substituent.
- Examples of the substituent in this case include divalent groups such as —O—, —S—, —NH—, —CH 2 — and the like. Among these, unsubstituted is preferable from the viewpoint of patterning characteristics. Moreover, it is preferable that it is methyl group substitution from a viewpoint of making it hard to produce film reduction.
- the partial structure represented by the formula (b-I-II) is a partial structure represented by the following formula (b-II-II-3) from the viewpoint of the remaining film ratio and the patterning characteristics. Preferably there is.
- R 13, R 14, R 15, R 16, m and n are as defined in the formula (b-I-II).
- R Z represents a hydrogen atom or a polybasic acid residue.
- the polybasic acid residue means a monovalent group obtained by removing one OH group from a polybasic acid or its anhydride. Further, another OH group may be removed and shared with R Z in other molecules represented by the formula (b-II-II-3), that is, a plurality of formulas may be connected via R Z. (BI-II-3) may be linked.
- Polybasic acids include maleic acid, succinic acid, itaconic acid, phthalic acid, tetrahydrophthalic acid, hexahydrophthalic acid, pyromellitic acid, trimellitic acid, benzophenone tetracarboxylic acid, methylhexahydrophthalic acid, end methylenetetrahydrophthalic acid
- One type or two or more types selected from acids, chlorendic acid, methyltetrahydrophthalic acid, and biphenyltetracarboxylic acid may be mentioned.
- maleic acid, succinic acid, itaconic acid, phthalic acid, tetrahydrophthalic acid, hexahydrophthalic acid, pyromellitic acid, trimellitic acid, and biphenyltetracarboxylic acid are more preferable.
- tetrahydrophthalic acid, biphenyltetracarboxylic acid, tetrahydrophthalic acid, biphenyltetracarboxylic acid are more preferable.
- the partial structure represented by the formula (bI-II-3) contained in one molecule of the epoxy (meth) acrylate resin may be one type or two or more types.
- R Z is a hydrogen atom, it may be mixed those R Z is a polybasic acid residue.
- the number of partial structures represented by the formula (bI-II) contained in one molecule of the (b-I-II) epoxy (meth) acrylate resin is not particularly limited, but is preferably 1 or more. 3 or more are more preferable, 20 or less are preferable, 15 or less are more preferable, and 10 or less are more preferable.
- the polystyrene-converted weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the (b-I-II) epoxy (meth) acrylate resin measured by gel permeation chromatography (GPC) is not particularly limited, but is preferably 1000 or more, more preferably 2000 or more. It is preferably 30000 or less, more preferably 20000 or less, further preferably 10,000 or less, still more preferably 7000 or less, and particularly preferably 5000 or less. When it is at least the lower limit value, the patterning characteristics tend to be good, and when it is at most the upper limit value, a strong film is likely to be obtained and surface roughness tends not to occur.
- the acid value of the (b-II-II) epoxy (meth) acrylate resin is not particularly limited, but is preferably 10 mgKOH / g or more, more preferably 20 mgKOH / g or more, further preferably 40 mgKOH / g or more, and 60 mgKOH / g or more. More preferably, 80 mgKOH / g or more is particularly preferable, 100 mgKOH / g or more is most preferable, 200 mgKOH / g or less is preferable, 150 mgKOH / g or less is more preferable, and 120 gKOH / g or less is more preferable.
- the amount is not less than the lower limit, a strong film tends to be easily obtained, and when the amount is not more than the upper limit, the development solubility is improved and the resolution tends to be good.
- the (b-II) (meth) acrylic copolymer resin contains a repeating unit ⁇ having an ethylenically unsaturated bond in the side chain and a repeating unit ⁇ derived from an unsaturated carboxylic acid. It is considered that reliability can be ensured by having the repeating unit ⁇ , and surface smoothness can be improved by having the repeating unit ⁇ .
- the repeating unit ⁇ is not particularly limited as long as it has an ethylenically unsaturated bond in the side chain, and examples thereof include those having a chemical structure represented by the following general formula (I).
- R 1 and R 2 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
- R 3 represents a divalent linking group.
- the alkylene group which may have a substituent or the bivalent aromatic ring group which may have a substituent is mentioned.
- alkylene group examples include linear, branched or cyclic alkylene groups.
- the number of carbon atoms is preferably 1 or more, more preferably 2 or more, further preferably 3 or more, preferably 20 or less, more preferably 15 or less, It is more preferably 10 or less, still more preferably 8 or less, and particularly preferably 5 or less.
- the reactivity tends to be improved by setting it to the lower limit value or more, and the thermal fluidity tends to decrease by setting the upper limit value or less.
- alkylene group examples include methylene group, ethylene group, propylene group, butylene group, isobutylene group, cyclohexylene group and the like.
- a methylene group, an ethylene group or a propylene group is preferable, and a propylene group is more preferable.
- divalent aromatic ring group examples include a divalent aromatic hydrocarbon ring group and a divalent aromatic heterocyclic group.
- the number of carbon atoms is preferably 4 or more, more preferably 5 or more, still more preferably 6 or more, and is preferably 30 or less, more preferably 20 or less, More preferably, it is more preferably 10 or less.
- the reactivity tends to be improved by setting it to the lower limit value or more, and the thermal fluidity tends to decrease by setting the upper limit value or less.
- the aromatic hydrocarbon ring in the aromatic hydrocarbon ring group may be a single ring or a condensed ring, such as a benzene ring, naphthalene ring, anthracene ring, phenanthrene ring, perylene ring, tetracene ring, pyrene. And groups such as a ring, a benzpyrene ring, a chrysene ring, a triphenylene ring, an acenaphthene ring, a fluoranthene ring, and a fluorene ring.
- the aromatic heterocyclic group in the aromatic heterocyclic group may be a single ring or a condensed ring, such as a furan ring, a benzofuran ring, a thiophene ring, a benzothiophene ring, a pyrrole ring, or a pyrazole ring.
- examples of the substituent that the alkylene group and the divalent aromatic ring group may have include a halogen atom, a phenyl group, a hydroxyl group, and a carboxyl group.
- a hydroxyl group is preferable from the viewpoint of reactivity.
- the chemical structure represented by the general formula (I) is preferably a chemical structure represented by the following general formula (I-1) or (I-2) from the viewpoint of reactivity.
- the chemical structure represented by I-1) is more preferred.
- R 1 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
- the chemical structures represented by the above general formulas (I-1) and (I-2) can be formed by adding an epoxy group-containing unsaturated compound to a repeating unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid.
- repeating unit ⁇ derived from unsaturated carboxylic acid for example, a repeating unit derived from acrylic acid, a repeating unit derived from methacrylic acid, a repeating unit derived from crotonic acid, a repeating unit derived from itaconic acid, a repeating unit derived from maleic acid Units, repeating units derived from fumaric acid, and the like.
- a repeating unit derived from acrylic acid and repeating units derived from methacrylic acid are preferred, and the chemistry represented by the following general formula (II) A structure is more preferable.
- R ⁇ 3 > represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group each independently.
- the (b-II) (meth) acrylic copolymer resin may further contain a repeating unit ⁇ in addition to the repeating units ⁇ and ⁇ .
- the repeating unit ⁇ include repeating units derived from ethylenically unsaturated compounds such as (meth) acrylic acid esters.
- the repeating unit ⁇ is represented by the following formula (IIIa). A repeating unit having a partial structure is preferred.
- R 1d to R 4d each independently represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms
- R 5d and R 6d each independently represent a hydrogen atom or 1 carbon atom.
- R 5d and R 6d may form a ring.
- the ring formed by linking R 5d and R 6d is preferably an aliphatic ring, which may be saturated or unsaturated, and preferably has 5 to 6 carbon atoms.
- the number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group in R 1d ⁇ R 4d is usually 1 or more, usually 10 or less, preferably 8 or less, more preferably 5 or less. There exists a tendency for it to become suitable image development solubility by setting it as the said upper limit or less. Among these, from the viewpoint of solubility, R 1d to R 4d are preferably hydrogen atoms.
- the number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group in R 5d and R 6d is usually 1 or more and usually 10 or less, preferably 8 or less, more preferably 5 or less.
- R 5d and R 6d are hydrogen atoms, or R 5d and R 6d are connected to form an aliphatic ring having 5 to 6 carbon atoms.
- repeating unit having a partial structure represented by the formula (IIIa) those represented by the following formula (III) are preferable from the viewpoint of curability.
- R 4 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group
- R 5 represents a partial structure represented by the formula (IIIa).
- the ethylenically unsaturated compound from which the repeating unit ⁇ is derived in addition to the (meth) acrylate having the partial structure represented by the above formula (IIIa), for example, ⁇ -, o-, m of styrene Styrenes such as-, p-alkyl, nitro, cyano, amide and ester derivatives, dienes such as butadiene, 2,3-dimethylbutadiene, isoprene and chloroprene, methyl (meth) acrylate, ethyl (meth) acrylate, (Meth) acrylic acid-n-propyl, (meth) acrylic acid-iso-propyl, (meth) acrylic acid-n-butyl, (meth) acrylic acid-sec-butyl, (meth) acrylic acid-tert-butyl, (Meth) acrylic acid pentyl, (meth) acrylic acid neopentyl, (meth)
- Radical polymerization such as saturated dicarboxylic acid diesters, monomaleimides such as N-phenylmaleimide, N-cyclohexylmaleimide, N-laurylmaleimide, N- (4-hydroxyphenyl) maleimide, N- (meth) acryloylphthalimide, etc.
- monomaleimides such as N-phenylmaleimide, N-cyclohexylmaleimide, N-laurylmaleimide, N- (4-hydroxyphenyl) maleimide, N- (meth) acryloylphthalimide, etc.
- Compound Things are also mentioned.
- the method for producing the (meth) acrylic copolymer resin is not particularly limited, and can be obtained by copolymerizing (meth) acrylate compounds corresponding to each of the repeating units ⁇ to ⁇ .
- a copolymer of an epoxy group-containing (meth) acrylate and an ethylenically unsaturated compound such as (meth) acrylic acid or (meth) acrylic acid ester is obtained, and an epoxy group contained in the copolymer is obtained. It can also be obtained by adding ethylenically unsaturated monocarboxylic acid.
- the content ratio of the repeating unit ⁇ in the (meth) acrylic copolymer resin is usually 10 mol% or more, preferably 12 mol% or more, more preferably 15 mol% or more, and more preferably 18 mol% or more. More preferably, 20 mol% or more is still more preferred, 22 mol% or more is particularly preferred, 25 mol% or more is most preferred, 40 mol% or less is preferred, 35 mol% or less is more preferred, and 30 mol% or less is preferred. More preferably, it is more preferably 25 mol% or less. When it is at least the lower limit value, it tends to be easy to ensure reliability, and when it is at most the upper limit value, surface smoothness tends to be ensured.
- the content ratio of the repeating unit ⁇ in the (b-II) (meth) acrylic copolymer resin is preferably 20 mol% or more, more preferably 30 mol% or more, further preferably 40 mol% or more, and 50 mol%.
- the above is most preferable, 70 mol% or less is preferable, 60 mol% or less is more preferable, and 50 mol% or less is more preferable.
- it is at least the lower limit value the development solubility tends to be ensured, and when it is at most the upper limit value, reliability tends to be ensured.
- the content of the repeating unit ⁇ in the (b-II) (meth) acrylic copolymer resin is usually 0 mol% or more, preferably 10 mol% or more, more preferably 20 mol% or more, more preferably 30 mol%.
- the above is more preferable, 60 mol% or less is preferable, 50 mol% or less is more preferable, and 40 mol% or less is more preferable.
- the weight average molecular weight (Mw) in terms of polystyrene measured by gel permeation chromatography (GPC) of the (b-II) (meth) acrylic copolymer resin is usually 3000 or more, preferably 5000 or more, more preferably 10,000. It is above, More preferably, it is 15000 or more, Usually 50000 or less, Preferably it is 30000 or less, More preferably, it is 20000 or less. When it is at least the lower limit, the reliability tends to be good, and when it is at most the upper limit, the development solubility tends to be good.
- the acid value of the (b-II) (meth) acrylic copolymer resin is not particularly limited, but is preferably 100 mg ⁇ KOH / g or more, more preferably 130 mg ⁇ KOH / g or more, and further preferably 160 mg ⁇ KOH / g or more, 180 mg ⁇ KOH / g or more is particularly preferred, 400 mg ⁇ KOH / g or less is preferred, 300 mg ⁇ KOH / g or less is more preferred, and 200 mg ⁇ KOH / g or less is even more preferred.
- the development solubility tends to be ensured
- reliability tends to be ensured.
- (b-II) (meth) acrylic copolymer resin containing a repeating unit ⁇ having an ethylenically unsaturated bond in the side chain and a repeating unit ⁇ derived from an unsaturated carboxylic acid is 1 Types may be included, or two or more types may be included. When two or more types are included, from the viewpoint of easily obtaining the effect of the present invention, in at least one type of resin, the content of the repeating unit ⁇ is preferably within the above range.
- the photosensitive coloring composition according to another embodiment contains a repeating unit ⁇ having an ethylenically unsaturated bond in the side chain and a repeating unit ⁇ derived from an unsaturated carboxylic acid (b-II) (meth).
- the content ratio of the repeating unit ⁇ contained therein is within the above range on the basis of all the repeating units of the (b-II) (meth) acrylic copolymer resin of all kinds. It can also be.
- the content ratio of the repeating unit ⁇ can be based on all repeating units of all types of (b-II) (meth) acrylic copolymer resins.
- the repeating unit ⁇ when the repeating unit ⁇ is included, the content can be based on all repeating units of all types of (b-II) (meth) acrylic copolymer resins.
- the (b) alkali-soluble resin used in the present invention contains other alkali-soluble resins in addition to the (b-I) epoxy (meth) acrylate resin and the (b-II) (meth) acrylic copolymer resin. Also good.
- alkali-soluble resins are not limited, and may be selected from resins usually used for photosensitive coloring compositions. Examples thereof include binder resins described in Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2007-271727, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2007-316620, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2007-334290, and the like. From the viewpoint of compatibility with pigments, dispersants and the like, acrylic resins are preferably used, and those described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-137466 can be more preferably used.
- the photopolymerization initiator is a component having a function of directly absorbing light, causing a decomposition reaction or a hydrogen abstraction reaction, and generating a polymerization active radical. If necessary, an additive such as a polymerization accelerator (chain transfer agent) or a sensitizing dye may be added and used.
- an additive such as a polymerization accelerator (chain transfer agent) or a sensitizing dye may be added and used.
- the photopolymerization initiator include metallocene compounds including titanocene compounds described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 59-152396 and Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 61-151197; Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No.
- N-aryl- ⁇ -amino acids such as halomethylated oxadiazole derivatives, halomethyl-s-triazine derivatives and N-phenylglycine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 10-39503, N Radical activators such as -aryl- ⁇ -amino acid salts and N-aryl- ⁇ -amino acid esters, ⁇ -aminoalkylphenone derivatives; Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2000-80068, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2006-36750, etc. And the oxime ester derivatives described in the above.
- titanocene derivatives include dicyclopentadienyl titanium dichloride, dicyclopentadienyl titanium bisphenyl, dicyclopentadienyl titanium bis (2,3,4,5,6-pentafluoro Phen-1-yl), dicyclopentadienyl titanium bis (2,3,5,6-tetrafluorophen-1-yl), dicyclopentadienyl titanium bis (2,4,6-trifluoropheny) 1-yl), dicyclopentadienyltitanium di (2,6-difluorophen-1-yl), dicyclopentadienyltitanium di (2,4-difluorophen-1-yl), di (methylcyclopenta Dienyl) titanium bis (2,3,4,5,6-pentafluorophen-1-yl), di (methylcyclone) Pentadienyl) titanium bis (2,6-difluorophen-1-yl), dicyclopentadieny
- Biimidazole derivatives include 2- (2′-chlorophenyl) -4,5-diphenylimidazole dimer, 2- (2′-chlorophenyl) -4,5-bis (3′-methoxyphenyl) imidazole. Dimer, 2- (2′-fluorophenyl) -4,5-diphenylimidazole dimer, 2- (2′-methoxyphenyl) -4,5-diphenylimidazole dimer, (4′-methoxyphenyl) ) -4,5-diphenylimidazole dimer and the like.
- halomethylated oxadiazole derivatives examples include 2-trichloromethyl-5- (2′-benzofuryl) -1,3,4-oxadiazole, 2-trichloromethyl-5- [ ⁇ - (2′- Benzofuryl) vinyl] -1,3,4-oxadiazole, 2-trichloromethyl-5- [ ⁇ - (2 ′-(6 ′′ -benzofuryl) vinyl)]-1,3,4-oxadiazole, 2 -Trichloromethyl-5-furyl-1,3,4-oxadiazole and the like.
- halomethyl-s-triazine derivatives examples include 2- (4-methoxyphenyl) -4,6-bis (trichloromethyl) -s-triazine, 2- (4-methoxynaphthyl) -4,6-bis ( Trichloromethyl) -s-triazine, 2- (4-ethoxynaphthyl) -4,6-bis (trichloromethyl) -s-triazine, 2- (4-ethoxycarbonylnaphthyl) -4,6-bis (trichloromethyl) -S-triazine and the like.
- ⁇ -aminoalkylphenone derivatives include 2-methyl-1- [4- (methylthio) phenyl] -2-morpholinopropan-1-one, 2-benzyl-2-dimethylamino-1- (4 -Morpholinophenyl) -butanone-1,2-benzyl-2-dimethylamino-1- (4-morpholinophenyl) butan-1-one, 4-dimethylaminoethylbenzoate, 4-dimethylaminoisoamylbenzo Eat, 4-diethylaminoacetophenone, 4-dimethylaminopropiophenone, 2-ethylhexyl-1,4-dimethylaminobenzoate, 2,5-bis (4-diethylaminobenzal) cyclohexanone, 7-diethylamino-3- ( 4-diethylaminobenzoyl) coumarin, 4- (diethylamino) chalcone, etc. And the like
- an oxime ester compound is particularly effective in terms of sensitivity and plate-making property, and when using an alkali-soluble resin containing a phenolic hydroxyl group, it is disadvantageous in terms of sensitivity.
- Such an oxime ester compound having excellent sensitivity is useful.
- Oxime ester compounds have a structure that absorbs ultraviolet rays, a structure that transmits light energy, and a structure that generates radicals in the structure, so they are highly sensitive in a small amount and stable against thermal reactions. It is possible to obtain a highly sensitive photosensitive coloring composition in a small amount.
- Examples of the oxime ester compound include compounds represented by the following general formula (IV).
- R 21a represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group which may have a substituent, or an aromatic ring group which may have a substituent.
- R 21b represents an arbitrary substituent containing an aromatic ring or a heteroaromatic ring.
- R 22a represents an alkanoyl group which may have a substituent or an aryloyl group which may have a substituent.
- the number of carbon atoms of the alkyl group in R 21a is not particularly limited, but is usually 1 or more, preferably 2 or more, and usually 20 or less, preferably 15 or less, more preferably 10 or less, from the viewpoint of solubility in a solvent and sensitivity. It is.
- Specific examples of the alkyl group include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, a cyclopentylethyl group, and a propyl group.
- alkyl group may have include an aromatic ring group, a hydroxyl group, a carboxyl group, a halogen atom, an amino group, an amide group, and 4- (2-methoxy-1-methyl) ethoxy-2-methylphenyl.
- the aromatic ring group in R 21a and an aromatic hydrocarbon ring group and aromatic heterocyclic group.
- the number of carbon atoms of the aromatic ring group is not particularly limited, but is preferably 5 or more from the viewpoint of solubility in the photosensitive coloring composition. Further, from the viewpoint of developability, it is preferably 30 or less, more preferably 20 or less, and further preferably 12 or less.
- aromatic ring group examples include a phenyl group, a naphthyl group, a pyridyl group, and a furyl group.
- a phenyl group or a naphthyl group is preferable, and a phenyl group is more preferable from the viewpoint of developability.
- substituent that the aromatic ring group may have include a hydroxyl group, a carboxyl group, a halogen atom, an amino group, an amide group, an alkyl group, and the like. From the viewpoint of developability, a hydroxyl group and a carboxyl group are preferable. Groups are more preferred.
- R 21a is preferably an alkyl group which may have a substituent, more preferably an unsubstituted alkyl group, and even more preferably a methyl group. .
- R 21b is preferably an optionally substituted carbazole group, an optionally substituted thioxanthonyl group, or an optionally substituted diphenyl sulfide group.
- an optionally substituted diphenyl sulfide group is preferable.
- the number of carbon atoms of the alkanoyl group in R 22a is not particularly limited, but from the viewpoint of solubility in a solvent and sensitivity, it is usually 2 or more, preferably 3 or more, and usually 20 or less, preferably 15 or less, more preferably 10 or less, more preferably 5 or less.
- Specific examples of the alkanoyl group include an acetyl group, an ethyloyl group, a propanoyl group, and a butanoyl group.
- the number of carbon atoms of the aryloyl group in R 22a is not particularly limited, but is usually 7 or more, preferably 8 or more, and usually 20 or less, preferably 15 or less, more preferably from the viewpoint of solubility in a solvent or sensitivity. 10 or less.
- Specific examples of the aryloyl group include a benzoyl group and a naphthoyl group.
- Examples of the substituent that the aryloyl group may have include a hydroxyl group, a carboxyl group, a halogen atom, an amino group, an amide group, and an alkyl group. From the viewpoint of ease of synthesis, it is preferably unsubstituted. .
- R 22a is preferably an alkanoyl group which may have a substituent, more preferably an unsubstituted alkanoyl group, and even more preferably an acetyl group.
- the compound represented by the following general formula (V) is preferable from the viewpoint of suppression of NMP elution.
- R 23 represents an alkyl group which may have a substituent or an aromatic ring group which may have a substituent.
- R 24 represents an alkyl group which may have a substituent, or an aromatic ring group which may have a substituent.
- R 25 represents a hydroxyl group, a carboxyl group or a group represented by the following general formula (V-1), and h represents an integer of 0 to 5.
- the benzene ring shown in the formula (V) may further have a substituent.
- R 25a represents —O—, —S—, —OCO— or —COO—.
- R 25b represents an alkylene group which may have a substituent.
- the alkylene part of R 25b may be interrupted 1 to 5 times by —O—, —S—, —COO— or —OCO—.
- the alkylene part of R 25 may have a branched side chain or cyclohexylene.
- R 25c represents a hydroxyl group or a carboxyl group.
- the number of carbon atoms of the alkyl group in R 23 is not particularly limited, but is preferably 1 or more from the viewpoint of solubility in the photosensitive coloring composition. Further, from the viewpoint of developability, it is preferably 20 or less, more preferably 10 or less, further preferably 8 or less, still more preferably 5 or less, and particularly preferably 3 or less. preferable.
- the alkyl group examples include a methyl group, a hexyl group, and a cyclopentylmethyl group. Among these, a methyl group or a hexyl group is preferable, and a methyl group is more preferable from the viewpoint of developability.
- the substituent that the alkyl group may have include an aromatic ring group, a hydroxyl group, a carboxyl group, a halogen atom, an amino group, an amide group, and the like, and a hydroxyl group and a carboxyl group are preferable from the viewpoint of alkali developability.
- a carboxyl group is more preferred. From the viewpoint of ease of synthesis, it is preferably unsubstituted.
- Examples of the aromatic ring group for R 23 include an aromatic hydrocarbon ring group and an aromatic heterocyclic group.
- the number of carbon atoms of the aromatic ring group is not particularly limited, but is preferably 5 or more from the viewpoint of solubility in the photosensitive coloring composition. Further, from the viewpoint of developability, it is preferably 30 or less, more preferably 20 or less, and further preferably 12 or less.
- aromatic ring group examples include a phenyl group, a naphthyl group, a pyridyl group, and a furyl group.
- a phenyl group or a naphthyl group is preferable, and a phenyl group is more preferable from the viewpoint of developability.
- substituent that the aromatic ring group may have include a hydroxyl group, a carboxyl group, a halogen atom, an amino group, an amide group, an alkyl group, and the like. From the viewpoint of developability, a hydroxyl group and a carboxyl group are preferable. Groups are more preferred.
- R 23 is preferably an alkyl group which may have a substituent, more preferably an unsubstituted alkyl group, and even more preferably a methyl group. .
- the number of carbon atoms of the alkyl group in R 24 is not particularly limited, but is preferably 1 or more from the viewpoint of sensitivity. Further, from the viewpoint of sensitivity, it is preferably 20 or less, more preferably 10 or less, further preferably 5 or less, and particularly preferably 3 or less.
- the alkyl group examples include a methyl group, an ethyl group, and a propyl group. Among these, a methyl group or an ethyl group is preferable, and a methyl group is more preferable from the viewpoint of sensitivity.
- the substituent that the alkyl group may have include a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group, a carboxyl group, an amino group, and an amide group. From the viewpoint of alkali developability, a hydroxyl group and a carboxyl group are preferable, and a carboxyl group is more preferable. On the other hand, from the viewpoint of ease of synthesis, it is preferably unsubstituted.
- Examples of the aromatic ring group for R 24 include an aromatic hydrocarbon ring group and an aromatic heterocyclic group.
- the number of carbon atoms is preferably 30 or less, more preferably 12 or less, usually 4 or more, and preferably 6 or more.
- the amount is not more than the upper limit value, the sensitivity tends to be high, and when the value is not less than the lower limit value, there is a tendency to be low sublimation.
- An aromatic hydrocarbon ring group means an aromatic hydrocarbon ring having one free valence.
- the aromatic hydrocarbon ring of the aromatic hydrocarbon ring group may be a single ring or a condensed ring, such as a benzene ring, naphthalene ring, anthracene ring, phenanthrene ring, perylene ring, tetracene ring, pyrene ring, benzpyrene. Ring, chrysene ring, triphenylene ring, acenaphthene ring, fluoranthene ring, fluorene ring and the like.
- An aromatic heterocyclic group means an aromatic heterocyclic ring having one free valence.
- the aromatic heterocyclic ring of the aromatic heterocyclic group may be a single ring or a condensed ring, such as a furan ring, a benzofuran ring, a thiophene ring, a benzothiophene ring, a pyrrole ring, a pyrazole ring, an imidazole ring, Oxadiazole ring, indole ring, carbazole ring, pyrroloimidazole ring, pyrrolopyrazole ring, pyrrolopyrrole ring, thienopyrrole ring, thienothiophene ring, furopyrrole ring, furofuran ring, thienofuran ring, benzoisoxazole ring, benzoisothiazole ring, benzo Imidazole ring, pyridine ring, pyrazine ring, pyridazine ring, pyrimidine ring, triazin
- R 24 is preferably an alkyl group which may have a substituent, more preferably an unsubstituted alkyl group, and further preferably a methyl group.
- R 24 is preferably an aromatic ring group which may have a substituent, and more preferably an aromatic hydrocarbon group which may have a substituent. Further, an unsubstituted aromatic hydrocarbon group is more preferable, and a phenyl group is particularly preferable.
- R 25 is a hydroxyl group, a carboxyl group, or a group represented by the general formula (V-1), and among these, from the viewpoint of sensitivity and developability, it is represented by the general formula (V-1). It is preferably a group.
- R 25a is, -O -, - S -, - OCO- or represents a -COO-, among these, from the viewpoints of sensitivity and developability, - O— or —OCO— is preferable, and —O— is more preferable.
- R 25b represents an alkylene group which may have a substituent.
- the number of carbon atoms of the alkylene group in R 25b is not particularly limited, but is preferably 1 or more from the viewpoint of solubility in the photosensitive coloring composition, more preferably 2 or more, and 20 or less. Is preferably 10 or less, more preferably 5 or less, and particularly preferably 3 or less.
- the alkylene group may be a straight chain, may be branched, or may contain an aliphatic ring. Among these, a straight chain is preferable from the viewpoint of solubility in the photosensitive coloring composition.
- alkylene group examples include a methylene group, an ethylene group, and a propylene group.
- a methylene group is more preferable from the viewpoint of solubility in the photosensitive coloring composition.
- R 25c is a hydroxyl group or a carboxyl group. From the viewpoint of reliability (liquid crystal contamination), R 25c is preferably a hydroxyl group.
- h represents an integer of 0 to 5.
- h is preferably 1 or more, preferably 4 or less, more preferably 3 or less, further preferably 2 or less, and preferably 1. Most preferred.
- h is preferably 0.
- oxime ester compounds represented by the general formulas (IV) and (V) include the following.
- the method for producing the oxime ester compound represented by the general formula (V) is not particularly limited, and for example, it can be produced by the method described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2000-080068.
- oxime ester-based compound compounds other than the general formulas (IV) and (V) can be used.
- Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2000-80068 Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2006-36750
- oxime ester derivatives described in International Publication No. 2008/077554 International Publication No. 2009/131189, Japanese Special Publication No. 2014-500852, and the like.
- a photoinitiator may be used individually by 1 type, or may be used in combination of 2 or more type.
- a sensitizing dye and a polymerization accelerator corresponding to the wavelength of the image exposure light source can be blended with the photopolymerization initiator as necessary for the purpose of increasing the sensitivity.
- sensitizing dyes xanthene dyes described in JP-A-4-221958, JP-A-4-219756, JP-A-3-239703, JP-A-5-289335
- amino group-containing sensitizing dyes preferred are amino group-containing sensitizing dyes, and more preferred are compounds having an amino group and a phenyl group in the same molecule. Particularly preferred are, for example, 4,4′-dimethylaminobenzophenone, 4,4′-diethylaminobenzophenone, 2-aminobenzophenone, 4-aminobenzophenone, 4,4′-diaminobenzophenone, 3,3′-diaminobenzophenone.
- Benzophenone compounds such as 3,4-diaminobenzophenone; 2- (p-dimethylaminophenyl) benzoxazole, 2- (p-diethylaminophenyl) benzoxazole, 2- (p-dimethylaminophenyl) benzo [4,5 ] Benzoxazole, 2- (p-dimethylaminophenyl) benzo [6,7] benzoxazole, 2,5-bis (p-diethylaminophenyl) -1,3,4-oxazole, 2- (p-dimethylaminophenyl) ) Benzothiazole, 2- (p-die) Tilaminophenyl) benzothiazole, 2- (p-dimethylaminophenyl) benzimidazole, 2- (p-diethylaminophenyl) benzimidazole, 2,5-bis (p-diethylaminophenyl) -1,3,4-thiadiazole
- polymerization accelerator examples include aromatic amines such as ethyl p-dimethylaminobenzoate and 2-dimethylaminoethyl benzoate, aliphatic amines such as n-butylamine and N-methyldiethanolamine, and mercapto compounds described later. It is done.
- a polymerization accelerator may be used individually by 1 type, or may be used in combination of 2 or more type.
- the photosensitive coloring composition of the present invention contains (d) an ethylenically unsaturated compound.
- the ethylenically unsaturated compound used in the present invention is a compound having at least one ethylenically unsaturated group in the molecule. Specifically, for example, (meth) acrylic acid, (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester, acrylonitrile, styrene, a carboxylic acid having one ethylenically unsaturated bond, a monoester of polyhydric or monohydric alcohol, etc. It is done.
- a polyfunctional ethylenic monomer having two or more ethylenically unsaturated groups in one molecule is particularly desirable.
- the number of ethylenically unsaturated groups possessed by the polyfunctional ethylenic monomer is not particularly limited, but is usually 2 or more, preferably 4 or more, more preferably 5 or more, and preferably 8 or less. Yes, more preferably 7 or less. There exists a tendency for it to become high sensitivity by setting it as the said lower limit or more, and there exists a tendency for the solubility to a solvent to improve by setting it as the said upper limit or less.
- polyfunctional ethylenic monomer examples include, for example, an ester of an aliphatic polyhydroxy compound and an unsaturated carboxylic acid; an ester of an aromatic polyhydroxy compound and an unsaturated carboxylic acid; an aliphatic polyhydroxy compound, and an aromatic polyhydroxy compound.
- esters obtained by an esterification reaction of a polyvalent hydroxy compound such as a hydroxy compound with an unsaturated carboxylic acid and a polybasic carboxylic acid.
- ester of the aliphatic polyhydroxy compound and the unsaturated carboxylic acid examples include ethylene glycol diacrylate, triethylene glycol diacrylate, trimethylolpropane triacrylate, trimethylolethane triacrylate, pentaerythritol diacrylate, pentaerythritol triacrylate, Acrylic acid esters of aliphatic polyhydroxy compounds such as pentaerythritol tetraacrylate, dipentaerythritol tetraacrylate, dipentaerythritol pentaacrylate, dipentaerythritol hexaacrylate, glycerol acrylate, etc.
- itaconic acid ester replaced by itaconate
- ester of an aromatic polyhydroxy compound and an unsaturated carboxylic acid examples include acrylic acid esters and methacrylic acid esters of aromatic polyhydroxy compounds such as hydroquinone diacrylate, hydroquinone dimethacrylate, resorcin diacrylate, resorcin dimethacrylate, pyrogallol triacrylate and the like. Etc.
- the ester obtained by the esterification reaction of a polybasic carboxylic acid and an unsaturated carboxylic acid and a polyvalent hydroxy compound is not necessarily a single substance, but representative examples include acrylic acid, phthalic acid, and Examples include condensates of ethylene glycol, condensates of acrylic acid, maleic acid and diethylene glycol, condensates of methacrylic acid, terephthalic acid and pentaerythritol, condensates of acrylic acid, adipic acid, butanediol and glycerin.
- a polyisocyanate compound and a hydroxyl group-containing (meth) acrylate ester or a polyisocyanate compound and a polyol and a hydroxyl group-containing (meth) acrylate ester are reacted.
- urethane (meth) acrylates examples include DPHA-40H, UX-5000, UX-5002D-P20, UX-5003, UX-5005 (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), U-2PPA, U-6LPA, U -10PA, U-33H, UA-53H, UA-32P, UA-1100H (made by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.), UA-306H, UA-510H, UF-8001G (made by Kyoeisha Chemical Co., Ltd.), UV-1700B , UV-7600B, UV-7605B, UV-7630B, UV7640B (manufactured by Nippon Synthetic Chemical).
- (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester as (d) ethylenically unsaturated compound, and it is more preferable to use dipentaerythritol hexaacrylate. These may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
- the photosensitive coloring composition of the present invention contains (e) a solvent.
- a pigment can be disperse
- the photosensitive coloring composition of the present invention usually contains (a) a colorant, (b) an alkali-soluble resin, (c) a photopolymerization initiator, (d) an ethylenically unsaturated compound, (f) a dispersant, and necessary.
- Various other materials used according to the above are used in a state dissolved or dispersed in a solvent.
- organic solvents are preferable from the viewpoints of dispersibility and coatability.
- organic solvents those having a boiling point in the range of 100 to 300 ° C. are preferably selected from the viewpoint of applicability, and those having a boiling point in the range of 120 to 280 ° C. are more preferable.
- the boiling point here means the boiling point at a pressure of 1013.25 hPa.
- organic solvents include the following. Ethylene glycol monomethyl ether, ethylene glycol monoethyl ether, ethylene glycol monopropyl ether, ethylene glycol monobutyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl ether, propylene glycol monoethyl ether, propylene glycol mono-n-butyl ether, propylene glycol t-butyl ether, diethylene glycol monomethyl Ether, diethylene glycol monoethyl ether, diethylene glycol mono-n-butyl ether, methoxymethylpentanol, dipropylene glycol monoethyl ether, dipropylene glycol monomethyl ether, 3-methyl-3-methoxybutanol, triethylene glycol monomethyl ether, triethylene glycol Monoe Ether, glycol monoalkyl ethers such as tripropylene glycol methyl ether; Glycol dialkyl ethers such as ethylene glycol dimethyl ether, ethylene glycol diethyl
- acetone Like acetone, methyl ethyl ketone, methyl amyl ketone, methyl isopropyl ketone, methyl isoamyl ketone, diisopropyl ketone, diisobutyl ketone, methyl isobutyl ketone, cyclohexanone, ethyl amyl ketone, methyl butyl ketone, methyl hexyl ketone, methyl nonyl ketone, methoxymethyl pentanone Ketones; Mono- or polyhydric alcohols such as ethanol, propanol, butanol, hexanol, cyclohexanol, ethylene glycol, propylene glycol, butanediol, diethylene glycol, dipropylene glycol, triethylene glycol, methoxymethylpentanol, glycerin, benzyl alcohol; aliphatic hydrocarbons such as n-pentan
- Aromatic hydrocarbons such as benzene, toluene, xylene, cumene; Amyl formate, ethyl formate, ethyl acetate, butyl acetate, propyl acetate, amyl acetate, methyl isobutyrate, ethylene glycol acetate, ethyl propionate, propyl propionate, butyl butyrate, isobutyl butyrate, methyl isobutyrate, ethyl Caprylate, butyl stearate, ethyl benzoate, methyl 3-ethoxypropionate, ethyl 3-ethoxypropionate, methyl 3-methoxypropionate, ethyl 3-methoxypropionate, propyl 3-methoxypropionate, 3-methoxypropionic acid Linear or cyclic esters such as butyl, ⁇ -butyrolactone; Alkoxycarboxylic acids such as 3-methoxy
- organic solvents corresponding to the above include mineral spirits, Valsol # 2, Apco # 18 solvent, Apco thinner, Soal Solvent No. 1 and no. 2, Solvesso # 150, Shell TS28 Solvent, carbitol, ethyl carbitol, butyl carbitol, methyl cellosolve (“Cerosolve” is a registered trademark, the same applies hereinafter), ethyl cellosolve, ethyl cellosolve acetate, methyl cellosolve acetate, diglyme (any Product name). These organic solvents may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
- an organic solvent having a boiling point in the range of 100 to 200 ° C. (under a pressure of 1013.25 hPa. The same applies to the boiling points hereinafter). More preferably, it has a boiling point of 120 to 170 ° C.
- glycol alkyl ether acetates are preferred from the viewpoints of good balance of coatability, surface tension and the like, and relatively high solubility of the constituent components in the composition.
- glycol alkyl ether acetates may be used alone or in combination with other organic solvents.
- glycol monoalkyl ethers are particularly preferable.
- propylene glycol monomethyl ether is particularly preferred because of the solubility of the constituent components in the composition.
- Glycol monoalkyl ethers are highly polar, and if the amount added is too large, the pigment tends to aggregate, and the storage stability such as the viscosity of the colored resin composition obtained later tends to decrease.
- the proportion of glycol monoalkyl ethers in the solvent is preferably 5% by mass to 30% by mass, and more preferably 5% by mass to 20% by mass.
- an organic solvent having a boiling point of 150 ° C. or higher (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “high boiling point solvent”).
- high boiling point solvent an organic solvent having a boiling point of 150 ° C. or higher
- the photosensitive coloring composition is difficult to dry, but has an effect of preventing the uniform dispersion state of the pigment in the composition from being destroyed by rapid drying. That is, for example, there is an effect of preventing the occurrence of a foreign matter defect due to precipitation or solidification of a color material or the like at the tip of the slit nozzle.
- diethylene glycol mono-n-butyl ether, diethylene glycol mono-n-butyl ether acetate, and diethylene glycol monoethyl ether acetate are particularly preferred because of their high effects.
- the content of the high boiling point solvent in the organic solvent is preferably 3% by mass to 50% by mass, more preferably 5% by mass to 40% by mass, and particularly preferably 5% by mass to 30% by mass.
- the drying temperature of the composition Is suppressed, and there is a tendency that problems such as a tact defect in the reduced-pressure drying process and a pin mark of prebaking can be suppressed.
- the high boiling point solvent having a boiling point of 150 ° C. or higher may be glycol alkyl ether acetates or glycol alkyl ethers. In this case, a high boiling point solvent having a boiling point of 150 ° C. or higher is separately contained. It doesn't have to be.
- Preferred high boiling solvents include, for example, diethylene glycol mono-n-butyl ether acetate, diethylene glycol monoethyl ether acetate, dipropylene glycol methyl ether acetate, 1,3-butylene glycol diacetate, and 1,6-hexanol diester. Examples include acetate and triacetin.
- a polymer dispersant having a functional group is preferable, and further, from the viewpoint of dispersion stability, a carboxyl group; a phosphoric acid group; a sulfonic acid group; or a base thereof; primary, secondary or tertiary A polymeric dispersant having a functional group such as an amino group; a quaternary ammonium base; a group derived from a nitrogen-containing heterocycle such as pyridine, pyrimidine, or pyrazine is preferable.
- a polymer dispersant having a basic functional group such as a primary, secondary or tertiary amino group; a quaternary ammonium base; a group derived from a nitrogen-containing heterocycle such as pyridine, pyrimidine or pyrazine, disperses the pigment.
- a basic functional group such as a primary, secondary or tertiary amino group
- a quaternary ammonium base such as pyridine, pyrimidine or pyrazine
- polymer dispersants include urethane dispersants, acrylic dispersants, polyethyleneimine dispersants, polyallylamine dispersants, dispersants composed of amino group-containing monomers and macromonomers, and polyoxyethylene alkyl ethers.
- examples thereof include a system dispersant, a polyoxyethylene diester dispersant, a polyether phosphate dispersant, a polyester phosphate dispersant, a sorbitan aliphatic ester dispersant, and an aliphatic modified polyester dispersant.
- a dispersant examples include trade names of EFKA (registered trademark, manufactured by BASF), DISPERBYK (registered trademark, manufactured by BYK Chemie), Disparon (registered trademark, manufactured by Enomoto Kasei), and SOLPERSE. (Registered trademark, manufactured by Lubrizol Corp.), KP (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.), polyflow (manufactured by Kyoeisha Chemical Co., Ltd.), Ajisper (registered trademark, manufactured by Ajinomoto Co., Inc.) and the like. These polymer dispersants may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
- the weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the polymer dispersant is usually 700 or more, preferably 1000 or more, and usually 100,000 or less, preferably 50,000 or less.
- the dispersant preferably contains a urethane polymer dispersant and / or an acrylic polymer dispersant having a functional group. It is particularly preferable to include it.
- a polymer dispersant having a basic functional group and having a polyester bond and / or a polyether bond is preferable.
- urethane and acrylic polymer dispersants examples include DISPERBYK 160 to 166, 182 series (both are urethane), DISPERBYK2000, 2001, LPN21116 and the like (both are acrylic) (all manufactured by Big Chemie).
- Specific examples of a preferable chemical structure as a urethane-based polymer dispersant include, for example, the same as a polyisocyanate compound and a compound having one or two hydroxyl groups in the molecule and a number average molecular weight of 300 to 10,000.
- examples thereof include a dispersion resin having a weight average molecular weight of 1,000 to 200,000 obtained by reacting a compound having an active hydrogen and a tertiary amino group in the molecule. By treating these with a quaternizing agent such as benzyl chloride, all or part of the tertiary amino group can be converted to a quaternary ammonium base.
- polyisocyanate compounds examples include paraphenylene diisocyanate, 2,4-tolylene diisocyanate, 2,6-tolylene diisocyanate, 4,4'-diphenylmethane diisocyanate, naphthalene-1,5-diisocyanate, and tolidine diisocyanate.
- polyisocyanate are trimers of organic diisocyanate, and most preferred are trimerene of tolylene diisocyanate and trimer of isophorone diisocyanate. These may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
- the polyisocyanate may be converted into an isocyanate group using an appropriate trimerization catalyst such as tertiary amines, phosphines, alkoxides, metal oxides, carboxylates and the like. And the trimerization is stopped by adding a catalyst poison, and then the unreacted polyisocyanate is removed by solvent extraction and thin-film distillation to obtain the desired isocyanurate group-containing polyisocyanate.
- an appropriate trimerization catalyst such as tertiary amines, phosphines, alkoxides, metal oxides, carboxylates and the like.
- Examples of the compound having one or two hydroxyl groups in the same molecule and having a number average molecular weight of 300 to 10,000 include polyether glycol, polyester glycol, polycarbonate glycol, polyolefin glycol and the like, and one terminal hydroxyl group of these compounds has a carbon number. Examples thereof include those alkoxylated with 1 to 25 alkyl groups and mixtures of two or more thereof.
- Polyether glycols include polyether diols, polyether ester diols, and mixtures of two or more of these.
- polyether diols are those obtained by homopolymerizing or copolymerizing alkylene oxides, such as polyethylene glycol, polypropylene glycol, polyethylene-propylene glycol, polyoxytetramethylene glycol, polyoxyhexamethylene glycol, polyoxyoctamethylene glycol, and the like. The mixture of 2 or more types of those is mentioned.
- Polyether ester diols include those obtained by reacting a mixture of ether group-containing diols or other glycols with dicarboxylic acids or their anhydrides, or by reacting polyester glycols with alkylene oxides, such as poly ( And polyoxytetramethylene) adipate.
- the polyether glycol is polyethylene glycol, polypropylene glycol, polyoxytetramethylene glycol or a compound in which one terminal hydroxyl group of these compounds is alkoxylated with an alkyl group having 1 to 25 carbon atoms.
- Polyester glycol includes dicarboxylic acid (succinic acid, glutaric acid, adipic acid, sebacic acid, fumaric acid, maleic acid, phthalic acid, etc.) or anhydrides thereof and glycol (ethylene glycol, diethylene glycol, triethylene glycol, propylene glycol, Dipropylene glycol, tripropylene glycol, 1,2-butanediol, 1,3-butanediol, 1,4-butanediol, 2,3-butanediol, 3-methyl-1,5-pentanediol, neopentyl glycol 2-methyl-1,3-propanediol, 2-methyl-2-propyl-1,3-propanediol, 2-butyl-2-ethyl-1,3-propanediol, 1,5-pentanediol, , 6-hexanediol, 2-methyl-2,4 Pentanediol, 2,2,
- Polycarbonate glycols include poly (1,6-hexylene) carbonate, poly (3-methyl-1,5-pentylene) carbonate, and polyolefin glycols include polybutadiene glycol, hydrogenated polybutadiene glycol, hydrogenated polyisoprene glycol, etc. Is mentioned. These may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
- the number average molecular weight of the compound having one or two hydroxyl groups in the same molecule is usually 300 to 10,000, preferably 500 to 6,000, and more preferably 1,000 to 4,000.
- Active hydrogen that is, a hydrogen atom directly bonded to an oxygen atom, a nitrogen atom or a sulfur atom includes a hydrogen atom in a functional group such as a hydroxyl group, an amino group, and a thiol group. Of these, the hydrogen atom of the amino group is preferred.
- the tertiary amino group is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include an amino group having an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, or a heterocyclic structure, more specifically, an imidazole ring or a triazole ring.
- Examples of such compounds having an active hydrogen and a tertiary amino group in the same molecule include N, N-dimethyl-1,3-propanediamine, N, N-diethyl-1,3-propanediamine, N , N-dipropyl-1,3-propanediamine, N, N-dibutyl-1,3-propanediamine, N, N-dimethylethylenediamine, N, N-diethylethylenediamine, N, N-dipropylethylenediamine, N, N -Dibutylethylenediamine, N, N-dimethyl-1,4-butanediamine, N, N-diethyl-1,4-butanediamine, N, N-dipropyl
- examples of the nitrogen-containing heterocyclic ring include pyrazole ring, imidazole ring, triazole ring, tetrazole ring, indole ring, carbazole ring, indazole ring, benzimidazole ring, benzo Nitrogen-containing hetero 6-membered rings such as triazole ring, benzoxazole ring, benzothiazole ring, benzothiadiazole ring, etc., pyridine ring, pyridazine ring, pyrimidine ring, triazine ring, quinoline ring, acridine ring, isoquinoline ring A ring is mentioned.
- nitrogen-containing heterocycles preferred are an imidazole ring or a triazole ring.
- these compounds having an imidazole ring and an amino group include 1- (3-aminopropyl) imidazole, histidine, 2-aminoimidazole, 1- (2-aminoethyl) imidazole and the like.
- specific examples of the compound having a triazole ring and an amino group include 3-amino-1,2,4-triazole, 5- (2-amino-5-chlorophenyl) -3-phenyl-1H-1 2,4-triazole, 4-amino-4H-1,2,4-triazole-3,5-diol, 3-amino-5-phenyl-1H-1,3,4-triazole, 5-amino-1 , 4-diphenyl-1,2,3-triazole, 3-amino-1-benzyl-1H-2,4-triazole and the like.
- N, N-dimethyl-1,3-propanediamine, N, N-diethyl-1,3-propanediamine, 1- (3-aminopropyl) imidazole, and 3-amino-1,2,4-triazole preferable. These may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
- the preferred blending ratio of the raw materials for producing the urethane polymer dispersant is 10 compounds having a number average molecular weight of 300 to 10,000 having one or two hydroxyl groups in the same molecule with respect to 100 parts by mass of the polyisocyanate compound.
- the production of the urethane-based polymer dispersant is performed according to a known method for producing a polyurethane resin.
- a solvent for production usually, ketones such as acetone, methyl ethyl ketone, methyl isobutyl ketone, cyclopentanone, cyclohexanone, isophorone, esters such as ethyl acetate, butyl acetate, cellosolve acetate, benzene, toluene, xylene, hexane Hydrocarbons such as diacetone alcohol, isopropanol, sec-butanol, tert-butanol, etc., chlorides such as methylene chloride and chloroform, ethers such as tetrahydrofuran and diethyl ether, dimethylformamide, N-methyl Aprotic polar solvents such as pyrrolidone and dimethyl sulfoxide are used. These may be used alone or in combination of
- a urethanization reaction catalyst is usually used.
- the catalyst include tin-based catalysts such as dibutyltin dilaurate, dioctyltin dilaurate, dibutyltin dioctate, and stannous octoate, iron-based catalysts such as iron acetylacetonate and ferric chloride, triethylamine, and triethylenediamine. And tertiary amine catalysts. These may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
- the introduction amount of the compound having active hydrogen and tertiary amino group in the same molecule is preferably controlled in the range of 1 to 100 mgKOH / g in terms of the amine value after the reaction. More preferably, it is in the range of 5 to 95 mgKOH / g.
- the amine value is a value obtained by neutralizing and titrating a basic amino group with an acid, and representing the acid value in mg of KOH. When the amine value is lower than the above range, the dispersing ability tends to be lowered, and when it exceeds the above range, the developability tends to be lowered.
- the weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the urethane-based polymer dispersant is usually in the range of 1,000 to 200,000, preferably 2,000 to 100,000, more preferably 3,000 to 50,000. If the molecular weight is less than 1,000, the dispersibility and dispersion stability tend to be inferior. If the molecular weight exceeds 200,000, the solubility is lowered and the dispersibility is inferior, and at the same time, the reaction tends to be difficult to control.
- an unsaturated group-containing monomer having a functional group (the functional group here is the functional group described above as the functional group contained in the polymer dispersant); It is preferable to use a random copolymer, a graft copolymer, or a block copolymer with an unsaturated group-containing monomer having no functional group. These copolymers can be produced by a known method.
- Examples of the unsaturated group-containing monomer having a functional group include (meth) acrylic acid, 2- (meth) acryloyloxyethyl succinic acid, 2- (meth) acryloyloxyethylphthalic acid, 2- (meth) acrylic acid.
- Tertiary amino groups such as unsaturated monomers having a carboxyl group such as leuoxyethyl hexahydrophthalic acid and acrylic acid dimer, dimethylaminoethyl (meth) acrylate, diethylaminoethyl (meth) acrylate and quaternized products thereof; Specific examples include unsaturated monomers having a quaternary ammonium base. These may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
- Examples of the unsaturated group-containing monomer having no functional group include methyl (meth) acrylate, ethyl (meth) acrylate, propyl (meth) acrylate, isopropyl (meth) acrylate, n-butyl (meth) acrylate, isobutyl ( (Meth) acrylate, t-butyl (meth) acrylate, benzyl (meth) acrylate, phenyl (meth) acrylate, cyclohexyl (meth) acrylate, phenoxyethyl (meth) acrylate, phenoxymethyl (meth) acrylate, 2-ethylhexyl (meth) Acrylate, isobornyl (meth) acrylate, tricyclodecane (meth) acrylate, tetrahydrofurfuryl (meth) acrylate, N-vinylpyrrolidone, styrene and its derivatives
- the acrylic polymer dispersant is particularly preferably an AB or BAB block copolymer composed of an A block having a functional group and a B block having no functional group.
- the block may contain a partial structure derived from the unsaturated group-containing monomer not containing the functional group. May be contained in the A block in any form of random copolymerization or block copolymerization.
- content in the A block of the partial structure which does not contain a functional group is 80 mass% or less normally, Preferably it is 50 mass% or less, More preferably, it is 30 mass% or less.
- the B block is composed of a partial structure derived from an unsaturated group-containing monomer that does not contain the above functional group, but a partial structure derived from two or more types of monomers is contained in one B block. These may be contained in the B block in any form of random copolymerization or block copolymerization.
- the AB or BAB block copolymer is prepared, for example, by the living polymerization method shown below.
- the living polymerization method includes an anion living polymerization method, a cation living polymerization method, and a radical living polymerization method. Among these, the anion living polymerization method has a polymerization active species as an anion, and is represented by the following scheme, for example.
- Ar 1 is a monovalent organic group
- Ar 2 is a monovalent organic group different from Ar 1
- M is a metal atom
- s and t are each an integer of 1 or more.
- the polymerization active species is a radical, and is represented by the following scheme, for example.
- Ar 1 is a monovalent organic group
- Ar 2 is a monovalent organic group different from Ar 1
- j and k are each an integer of 1 or more
- R a is a hydrogen atom or 1
- R b is a hydrogen atom different from R a or a monovalent organic group.
- the acrylic polymer dispersant that can be used in the present invention may be an AB block copolymer or a BAB block copolymer, and the A block constituting the copolymer.
- the / B block ratio is preferably 1/99 to 80/20, and particularly preferably 5/95 to 60/40 (mass ratio), and within this range, a balance between dispersibility and storage stability can be ensured.
- the amount of the quaternary ammonium base in 1 g of the AB block copolymer and BAB block copolymer that can be used in the present invention is preferably 0.1 to 10 mmol. There exists a tendency which can ensure favorable dispersibility by making it in the range.
- Such a block copolymer usually contains an amino group generated in the production process, but its amine value is about 1 to 100 mgKOH / g, and from the viewpoint of dispersibility, Preferably it is 10 mgKOH / g or more, More preferably, it is 30 mgKOH / g or more, More preferably, it is 50 mgKOH / g or more, Preferably it is 90 mgKOH / g or less, More preferably, it is 80 mgKOH / g or less, More preferably, it is 75 mgKOH / g or less.
- the amine value of the dispersant such as these block copolymers is expressed by the mass of KOH equivalent to the amount of base per gram of solid content excluding the solvent in the dispersant sample, and is measured by the following method. Disperse 0.5-1.5 g of the dispersant sample in a 100 mL beaker and dissolve with 50 mL of acetic acid. This solution is neutralized with a 0.1 mol / L HClO 4 acetic acid solution using an automatic titrator equipped with a pH electrode. Using the inflection point of the titration pH curve as the end point of titration, the amine value is determined by the following formula.
- Amine value [mgKOH / g] (561 ⁇ V) / (W ⁇ S) [However, W: Weighing amount of dispersant sample [g], V: Titration amount at the end of titration [mL], S: Solid content concentration [mass%] of the dispersant sample. ]
- the amine value of this block copolymer depends on the presence and type of the acid group that is the basis of the acid value, but generally it is preferably lower, usually 10 mg KOH / g or less, and its weight average molecular weight (Mw) ) Is preferably in the range of 1000 to 100,000. There exists a tendency which can ensure favorable dispersibility by setting it as the said range.
- the specific structure of the polymer dispersant is not particularly limited, but from the viewpoint of dispersibility, a repeating unit represented by the following formula (i) (hereinafter referred to as “repeating” It is preferable to have a unit (i) ”.
- R 31 to R 33 each independently have a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group which may have a substituent, an aryl group which may have a substituent, or a substituent.
- R 34 is hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
- X is a divalent linking group, and Y ⁇ is a counter anion.
- the number of carbon atoms of the alkyl group which may have a substituent in R 31 to R 33 in the above formula (i) is not particularly limited, but is usually 1 or more and preferably 10 or less. The following is more preferable.
- Specific examples of the alkyl group include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, a butyl group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, a heptyl group, and an octyl group. Among these, a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, and a butyl group are exemplified.
- It is preferably a group, a pentyl group, or a hexyl group, and more preferably a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, or a butyl group. Further, it may be linear or branched. Further, it may contain a cyclic structure such as a cyclohexyl group or a cyclohexylmethyl group.
- the number of carbon atoms of the aryl group which may have a substituent in R 31 to R 33 in the above formula (i) is not particularly limited, but is usually 6 or more and preferably 16 or less. The following is more preferable.
- Specific examples of the aryl group include a phenyl group, a methylphenyl group, an ethylphenyl group, a dimethylphenyl group, a diethylphenyl group, a naphthyl group, and an anthracenyl group.
- a phenyl group, a methylphenyl group, and an ethylphenyl group A dimethylphenyl group, or a diethylphenyl group, and more preferably a phenyl group, a methylphenyl group, or an ethylphenyl group.
- the carbon number of the aralkyl group which may have a substituent in R 31 to R 33 in the above formula (i) is not particularly limited, but is usually 7 or more and preferably 16 or less. The following is more preferable.
- Specific examples of the aralkyl group include a phenylmethylene group, a phenylethylene group, a phenylpropylene group, a phenylbutylene group, and a phenylisopropylene group.
- a phenylmethylene group, a phenylethylene group, a phenylpropylene group, or A phenylbutylene group is preferable, and a phenylmethylene group or a phenylethylene group is more preferable.
- R 31 to R 33 are each independently an alkyl group or an aralkyl group. Specifically, R 31 and R 33 are each independently a methyl group or an ethyl group. And R 32 is preferably a phenylmethylene group or a phenylethylene group, more preferably R 31 and R 33 are methyl groups, and R 32 is a phenylmethylene group.
- the polymer dispersant when it has a tertiary amine as a functional group, from the viewpoint of dispersibility, it may be a repeating unit represented by the following formula (ii) (hereinafter, referred to as “repeating unit (ii)”). .).
- R 35 and R 36 each independently have a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group which may have a substituent, an aryl group which may have a substituent, or a substituent. is also aralkyl group optionally may form a ring structure by combining R 35 and R 36 are each other.
- R 37 is a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
- Z is a divalent linking group.
- R 35 and R 36 in the formula (ii) as the alkyl group which may have a substituent, may be preferably used those exemplified as R 31 ⁇ R 33 in the formula (i) it can.
- the aryl group which may have a substituent in R 35 and R 36 in the above formula (ii) those exemplified as R 31 to R 33 in the above formula (i) should be preferably employed.
- the aralkyl group optionally having a substituent in R 35 and R 36 in the above formula (ii) those exemplified as R 31 to R 33 in the above formula (i) may be preferably employed. it can.
- R 35 and R 36 are preferably each independently an alkyl group which may have a substituent, and more preferably a methyl group or an ethyl group.
- alkyl group, aralkyl group or aryl group in R 31 to R 33 of the above formula (i) and R 35 and R 36 of the above formula (ii) may have include a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, A benzoyl group, a hydroxyl group, etc. are mentioned.
- the linking group X and Z for example, an alkylene group, an arylene group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, -CONH-R 43 - group, —COOR 44 — group (wherein R 43 and R 44 are a single bond, an alkylene group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, or an ether group (alkyloxyalkyl group) having 2 to 10 carbon atoms), etc. Is a —COO—R 44 — group.
- examples of Y ⁇ of the counter anion include Cl ⁇ , Br ⁇ , I ⁇ , ClO 4 ⁇ , BF 4 ⁇ , CH 3 COO ⁇ , PF 6 ⁇ and the like.
- the content rate of the repeating unit represented by the said formula (i) is not specifically limited, From a dispersible viewpoint, it is represented by the content rate of the repeating unit represented by the said formula (i), and the said formula (ii). Preferably it is 60 mol% or less, more preferably 50 mol% or less, still more preferably 40 mol% or less, particularly preferably 35 mol% or less, based on the total content of repeating units.
- the amount is preferably 5 mol% or more, more preferably 10 mol% or more, still more preferably 20 mol% or more, and particularly preferably 30 mol% or more.
- the content ratio of the repeating unit represented by the formula (i) in the total repeating units of the polymer dispersant is not particularly limited, but is preferably 1 mol% or more from the viewpoint of dispersibility, and 5 mol. % Or more, more preferably 10 mol% or more, more preferably 50 mol% or less, more preferably 30 mol% or less, and 20 mol% or less. Is more preferable, and it is especially preferable that it is 15 mol% or less.
- the content ratio of the repeating unit represented by the formula (ii) in all the repeating units of the polymer dispersant is not particularly limited, but is preferably 5 mol% or more from the viewpoint of dispersibility. % Or more, more preferably 15 mol% or more, particularly preferably 20 mol% or more, more preferably 60 mol% or less, and 40 mol% or less. Is more preferably 30 mol% or less, and particularly preferably 25 mol% or less.
- the polymer dispersant is a repeating unit represented by the following formula (iii) (hereinafter referred to as “repeating unit (iii)” from the viewpoint of improving compatibility with binder components such as a solvent and improving dispersion stability. It is preferable that it has.
- R 40 is an ethylene group or a propylene group
- R 41 is an alkyl group which may have a substituent
- R 42 is a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
- n is an integer of 1 to 20.
- the number of carbon atoms of the alkyl group which may have a substituent in R 41 of the above formula (iii) is not particularly limited, but is usually 1 or more, preferably 2 or more, and 10 or less. It is preferably 6 or less.
- Specific examples of the alkyl group include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, a butyl group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, a heptyl group, and an octyl group. Among these, a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, and a butyl group are exemplified.
- It is preferably a group, a pentyl group, or a hexyl group, and more preferably a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, or a butyl group. Further, it may be linear or branched. Further, it may contain a cyclic structure such as a cyclohexyl group or a cyclohexylmethyl group.
- n in the above formula (iii) is preferably 1 or more, more preferably 2 or more, and preferably 10 or less from the viewpoints of compatibility with a binder component such as a solvent and dispersibility. More preferably, it is 5 or less.
- the content ratio of the repeating unit represented by the formula (iii) in all the repeating units of the polymer dispersant is not particularly limited, but is preferably 1 mol% or more, and preferably 2 mol% or more. More preferably, it is 4 mol% or more, more preferably 30 mol% or less, more preferably 20 mol% or less, and even more preferably 10 mol% or less.
- the amount is within the above range, compatibility with a binder component such as a solvent tends to be compatible with dispersion stability.
- the polymer dispersant is a repeating unit represented by the following formula (iv) (hereinafter referred to as “repeating unit (iv)” from the viewpoint of improving the compatibility of the dispersing agent with a binder component such as a solvent and improving dispersion stability. ) ").).
- R 38 represents an alkyl group which may have a substituent, an aryl group which may have a substituent, or an aralkyl group which may have a substituent.
- R 39 is a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
- the number of carbon atoms of the alkyl group that may have a substituent in R 38 in the above formula (iv) is not particularly limited, but is usually 1 or more, preferably 2 or more, and preferably 4 or more. More preferably, it is preferably 10 or less, and more preferably 8 or less.
- Specific examples of the alkyl group include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, a butyl group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, a heptyl group, and an octyl group. Among these, a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, and a butyl group are exemplified.
- It is preferably a group, a pentyl group, or a hexyl group, and more preferably a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, or a butyl group. Further, it may be linear or branched. Further, it may contain a cyclic structure such as a cyclohexyl group or a cyclohexylmethyl group.
- the number of carbon atoms of the aryl group which may have a substituent in R 38 in the above formula (iv) is not particularly limited, but is usually 6 or more, preferably 16 or less, and preferably 12 or less. More preferably, it is more preferably 8 or less.
- Specific examples of the aryl group include a phenyl group, a methylphenyl group, an ethylphenyl group, a dimethylphenyl group, a diethylphenyl group, a naphthyl group, and an anthracenyl group.
- a phenyl group, a methylphenyl group, and an ethylphenyl group A dimethylphenyl group, or a diethylphenyl group, and more preferably a phenyl group, a methylphenyl group, or an ethylphenyl group.
- the carbon number of the aralkyl group which may have a substituent in R 38 in the above formula (iv) is not particularly limited, but is usually 7 or more, preferably 16 or less, and preferably 12 or less. More preferred is 10 or less.
- Specific examples of the aralkyl group include a phenylmethylene group, a phenylethylene group, a phenylpropylene group, a phenylbutylene group, and a phenylisopropylene group.
- a phenylmethylene group, a phenylethylene group, a phenylpropylene group, or A phenylbutylene group is preferable, and a phenylmethylene group or a phenylethylene group is more preferable.
- R 38 is an alkyl group or an aralkyl group, and more preferably a methyl group, an ethyl group or a phenylmethylene group.
- R 38 a substituent which may have an alkyl group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, and the like.
- substituent that the aryl group or aralkyl group may have include a chain alkyl group, a halogen atom, and an alkoxy group.
- the linear alkyl group represented by R 38 includes both linear and branched chains.
- the content of the repeating unit represented by the formula (iv) in all the repeating units of the polymer dispersant is preferably 30 mol% or more and 40 mol% or more from the viewpoint of dispersibility. More preferably, it is more preferably 50 mol% or more, more preferably 80 mol% or less, and even more preferably 70 mol% or less.
- the polymer dispersant may have a repeating unit other than the repeating unit (i), the repeating unit (ii), the repeating unit (iii), and the repeating unit (iv).
- repeating units include styrene monomers such as styrene and ⁇ -methylstyrene; (meth) acrylate monomers such as (meth) acrylic acid chloride; (meth) acrylamide, N- (Meth) acrylamide monomers such as methylolacrylamide; vinyl acetate; acrylonitrile; allyl glycidyl ether, crotonic acid glycidyl ether; and repeating units derived from monomers such as N-methacryloylmorpholine.
- the polymer dispersant is composed of an A block having the repeating unit (i) and the repeating unit (ii), and a B block not having the repeating unit (i) and the repeating unit (ii). It is preferable that it is a block copolymer which has these.
- the block copolymer is preferably an AB block copolymer or a BAB block copolymer. By introducing not only a quaternary ammonium base but also a tertiary amino group into the A block, the dispersing ability of the dispersant tends to be remarkably improved.
- the B block preferably has a repeating unit (iii), and more preferably has a repeating unit (iv).
- the repeating unit (i) and the repeating unit (ii) may be contained in any form of random copolymerization and block copolymerization.
- the repeating unit (i) and the repeating unit (ii) may be contained in two or more kinds in one A block. In that case, each repeating unit is randomly copolymerized in the A block. It may be contained in any form of block copolymerization.
- a repeating unit other than the repeating unit (i) and the repeating unit (ii) may be contained in the A block.
- Examples of such a repeating unit include the aforementioned (meth) acrylic acid ester-based unit.
- Examples include a repeating unit derived from a monomer.
- the content of the repeating unit other than the repeating unit (i) and the repeating unit (ii) in the A block is preferably 0 to 50 mol%, more preferably 0 to 20 mol%. Most preferably it is not contained in the block.
- Repeating units other than the repeating units (iii) and (iv) may be contained in the B block, and examples of such repeating units include styrene monomers such as styrene and ⁇ -methylstyrene; (Meth) acrylate monomers such as (meth) acrylic acid chloride; (meth) acrylamide monomers such as (meth) acrylamide and N-methylolacrylamide; vinyl acetate; acrylonitrile; allyl glycidyl ether, glycidyl crotonic acid Ether; repeating units derived from monomers such as N-methacryloylmorpholine.
- styrene monomers such as styrene and ⁇ -methylstyrene
- (Meth) acrylate monomers such as (meth) acrylic acid chloride
- (meth) acrylamide monomers such as (meth) acrylamide and N-methylolacrylamide
- vinyl acetate acrylon
- the content of the repeating unit other than the repeating unit (iii) and the repeating unit (iv) in the B block is preferably 0 to 50 mol%, more preferably 0 to 20 mol%. Most preferably it is not contained in the block.
- the dispersant is preferably used in combination with a pigment derivative described later.
- the photosensitive coloring composition of the present invention includes an adhesion improver such as a silane coupling agent, a coatability improver, a development improver, an ultraviolet absorber, an antioxidant, a surfactant, and a pigment derivative.
- an adhesion improver such as a silane coupling agent, a coatability improver, a development improver, an ultraviolet absorber, an antioxidant, a surfactant, and a pigment derivative.
- a photoacid generator, a crosslinking agent, a polymerization accelerator and the like can be appropriately blended.
- the photosensitive coloring composition of the present invention may contain an adhesion improver in order to improve the adhesion to the substrate.
- an adhesion improver a silane coupling agent, a phosphoric acid group-containing compound and the like are preferable.
- the kind of the silane coupling agent various kinds such as epoxy, (meth) acrylic and amino can be used alone or in combination of two or more.
- Preferred silane coupling agents include, for example, (meth) acryloxysilanes such as 3-methacryloxypropylmethyldimethoxysilane and 3-methacryloxypropyltrimethoxysilane, and 2- (3,4-epoxycyclohexyl) ethyltrimethoxysilane.
- Epoxy silanes such as 3-glycidoxypropyltrimethoxysilane, 3-glycidoxypropylmethyldiethoxysilane, 3-glycidoxypropyltriethoxysilane, and ureidosilanes such as 3-ureidopropyltriethoxysilane, Isocyanate silanes such as 3-isocyanatopropyltriethoxysilane are mentioned, and epoxy silane silane coupling agents are particularly preferable.
- the phosphoric acid group-containing compound (meth) acryloyl group-containing phosphates are preferable, and those represented by the following general formula (g1), (g2) or (g3) are preferable.
- R 51 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group
- l and l ′ are integers of 1 to 10
- m is 1, 2 or 3.
- These phosphoric acid group-containing compounds may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
- the photosensitive coloring composition of the present invention may contain a surfactant in order to improve coatability.
- surfactant for example, various types such as anionic, cationic, nonionic, and amphoteric surfactants can be used.
- nonionic surfactants are preferably used because they are less likely to adversely affect various properties, and among them, fluorine-based and silicon-based surfactants are effective in terms of coatability.
- fluorine-based and silicon-based surfactants include TSF4460 (manufactured by GE Toshiba Silicone), DFX-18 (manufactured by Neos), BYK-300, BYK-325, BYK-330 (manufactured by BYK Chemie), and KP340 (Shin-Etsu Silicone).
- F-470, F-475, F-478, F-559 DIC
- SH7PA Toray Silicone
- DS-401 Daikin
- L-77 Long Term Evolution
- FC4430 manufactured by Sumitomo 3M
- 1 type may be used for surfactant and it may use 2 or more types together by arbitrary combinations and a ratio.
- Pigment derivative The photosensitive coloring composition of the present invention may contain a pigment derivative as a dispersion aid in order to improve dispersibility and storage stability.
- a pigment derivative as a dispersion aid
- As pigment derivatives azo, phthalocyanine, quinacridone, benzimidazolone, quinophthalone, isoindolinone, dioxazine, anthraquinone, indanthrene, perylene, perinone, diketopyrrolopyrrole, dioxazine
- derivatives such as phthalocyanines and quinophthalones are preferable.
- Substituents of pigment derivatives include sulfonic acid groups, sulfonamide groups and quaternary salts thereof, phthalimidomethyl groups, dialkylaminoalkyl groups, hydroxyl groups, carboxyl groups, amide groups, etc. directly on the pigment skeleton or alkyl groups, aryl groups, and complex groups. Examples thereof include those bonded via a ring group and the like, and a sulfonic acid group is preferable. Further, a plurality of these substituents may be substituted on one pigment skeleton.
- pigment derivatives include phthalocyanine sulfonic acid derivatives, quinophthalone sulfonic acid derivatives, anthraquinone sulfonic acid derivatives, quinacridone sulfonic acid derivatives, diketopyrrolopyrrole sulfonic acid derivatives, and dioxazine sulfonic acid derivatives. These may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
- a photoacid generator is a compound capable of generating an acid by ultraviolet rays, and has a crosslinking agent such as a melamine compound due to the action of an acid generated upon exposure. The crosslinking reaction will proceed.
- a photoacid generator those having a high solubility in a solvent, particularly in a solvent used in a photosensitive coloring composition, are preferable, for example, diphenyliodonium, ditolyliodonium, phenyl (p-anisyl).
- Iodonium bis (m-nitrophenyl) iodonium, bis (p-tert-butylphenyl) iodonium, bis (p-chlorophenyl) iodonium, bis (n-dodecyl) iodonium, p-isobutylphenyl (p-tolyl) iodonium, p Diaryl iodonium such as isopropylphenyl (p-tolyl) iodonium, or triarylsulfonium chloride such as triphenylsulfonium, bromide, borofluoride, hexafluorophosphate salt, hexafluoroa Senate salts, aromatic sulfonates, tetrakis (pentafluorophenyl) borate salts and the like, sulfonium organoboron complexes such as diphenylphenacylsulfonium (n-butyl) triphen
- Crosslinking agent can be further added to the photosensitive coloring composition of the present invention.
- a melamine or guanamine compound can be used.
- these cross-linking agents include melamine or guanamine compounds represented by the following general formula (6).
- R 61 represents a —NR 66 R 67 group or an aryl group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms
- R 61 represents R 62, R 63 , R 64 , R 65 , one of R 66 and R 67
- R 61 represents R 62, R 63, one of R 64 and R 65 are -CH 2 oR 68 group in the case of an aryl group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms
- R 62 , R 63 , R 64 , R 65 , R 66 and R 67 independently of one another, represent hydrogen or a —CH 2 OR 68 group, wherein R 68 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
- the aryl group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms is typically a phenyl group, 1-naphthyl group or 2-naphthyl group, and these phenyl group and naphthyl group include an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, a halogen atom, etc. May be bonded to each other.
- Each of the alkyl group and the alkoxy group may have about 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
- Alkyl group represented by R 68 is, among the above, methyl group or an ethyl group, especially a methyl group.
- Melamine compounds corresponding to the general formula (6) that is, compounds of the following general formula (6-1) include hexamethylol melamine, pentamethylol melamine, tetramethylol melamine, hexamethoxymethyl melamine, pentamethoxymethyl melamine, tetramethoxy Methyl melamine, hexaethoxymethyl melamine and the like are included.
- guanamine compounds corresponding to the general formula (6) that is, compounds in which R 61 in the general formula (6) is aryl include tetramethylol benzoguanamine, tetramethoxymethyl benzoguanamine, trimethoxymethyl benzoguanamine, tetraethoxymethyl benzoguanamine. Etc. are included.
- a crosslinking agent having a methylol group or a methylol alkyl ether group can also be used. Examples are given below. 2,6-bis (hydroxymethyl) -4-methylphenol, 4-tert-butyl-2,6-bis (hydroxymethyl) phenol, 5-ethyl-1,3-bis (hydroxymethyl) perhydro-1,3 , 5-triazin-2-one (commonly known as N-ethyldimethyloltriazone) or its dimethyl ether, dimethylol trimethylene urea or its dimethyl ether, 3,5-bis (hydroxymethyl) perhydro-1,3,5- Oxadiazin-4-one (commonly called dimethyloluron) or a dimethyl ether thereof, tetramethylol glyoxal diurein or a tetramethyl ether thereof.
- crosslinking agents may be used individually by 1 type, or may be used in combination of 2 or more type.
- the amount of the crosslinking agent used is preferably 0.1 to 15% by mass, particularly preferably 0.5 to 10% by mass, based on the total solid content of the photosensitive coloring composition.
- Mercapto compounds include 2-mercaptobenzothiazole, 2-mercaptobenzoxazole, 2-mercaptobenzimidazole, hexanedithiol, decandithiol, 1,4-dimethylmercaptobenzene, butanediol bisthiopropionate, butanediol bis Thioglycolate, ethylene glycol bisthioglycolate, trimethylolpropane tristhioglycolate, butanediol bisthiopropionate, trimethylolpropane tristhiopropionate, trimethylolpropane tristhioglycolate, pentaerythritol tetrakisthiopropioate , Pentaerythritol tetrakisthioglycolate, trishydroxyethyltristhiopropionate, ethylene glycol (3-mercaptobutyrate), butanediol bis (3-mercapto
- the content ratio of (a) the colorant is usually 10% by mass or more and 20% by mass or more with respect to the total solid content in the photosensitive coloring composition. Preferably, it is more preferably 30% by mass or more, still more preferably 35% by mass or more, particularly preferably 40% by mass or more, and usually preferably 60% by mass or less, The content is more preferably at most mass%, further preferably at most 48 mass%, particularly preferably at most 46 mass%.
- OD optical density
- the content ratio of the organic pigment to the (a) colorant is preferably 1% by mass or more, more preferably 5% by mass or more, and more preferably 10% by mass. More preferably, it is more preferably 30% by mass or more, particularly preferably 50% by mass or more, most preferably 70% by mass or more, and usually 100% by mass or less. It is preferably 99% by mass or less, more preferably 95% by mass or less, further preferably 90% by mass or less, still more preferably 85% by mass or less, and 80% by mass or less. It is particularly preferred that There exists a tendency for sufficient optical density (OD) to be acquired by setting it as the said lower limit or more, and there exists a tendency which can ensure platemaking characteristics by setting it as the said upper limit or less.
- OD optical density
- the content ratio of the organic color pigment to (a) the colorant is preferably 1% by mass or more, more preferably 5% by mass or more. More preferably, it is more preferably 30% by mass or more, still more preferably 30% by mass or more, particularly preferably 50% by mass or more, most preferably 70% by mass or more, and usually 100% by mass. It is preferably 99% by mass or less, more preferably 95% by mass or less, further preferably 90% by mass or less, still more preferably 85% by mass or less, and 80% by mass. % Or less is particularly preferable. There exists a tendency for sufficient optical density (OD) to be acquired by setting it as the said lower limit or more, and there exists a tendency which can ensure platemaking characteristics by setting it as the said upper limit or less.
- OD optical density
- the colorant contains at least one pigment selected from the group consisting of a red pigment and an orange pigment
- at least one pigment selected from the group consisting of a red pigment and an orange pigment for the colorant Is preferably 1% by mass or more, more preferably 2% by mass or more, further preferably 3% by mass or more, and preferably 30% by mass or less, 20% by mass. % Or less, more preferably 15% by weight or less, still more preferably 10% by weight or less, particularly preferably 7% by weight or less, and 5% by weight or less. Is most preferred. There exists a tendency for sufficient optical density (OD) to be acquired by setting it as the said lower limit or more, and there exists a tendency which can ensure platemaking characteristics by setting it as the said upper limit or less.
- OD optical density
- the colorant contains at least one pigment selected from the group consisting of a blue pigment and a purple pigment
- at least one pigment selected from the group consisting of a blue pigment and a purple pigment with respect to the colorant Is preferably 20% by mass or more, more preferably 30% by mass or more, further preferably 40% by mass or more, still more preferably 50% by mass or more, and 60% by mass. % Or more, particularly preferably 65% by weight or more, more preferably 90% by weight or less, more preferably 80% by weight or less, and 70% by weight or less. Is more preferable. There exists a tendency which can ensure light-shielding property by setting it as the said lower limit or more, and there exists a tendency which can ensure plate-making characteristic by setting it as the said upper limit or less.
- the content ratio of the black color material to (a) the colorant is preferably 5% by mass or more, more preferably 10% by mass or more, and 15% by mass. % Or more, more preferably 20% by weight or more, more preferably 50% by weight or less, more preferably 40% by weight or less, and 35% by weight or less. Is more preferable, and it is still more preferable that it is 30 mass% or less.
- OD optical density
- the content ratio of the black organic pigment to (a) the colorant is preferably 1% by mass or more, more preferably 5% by mass or more. More preferably, it is more preferably at least 20% by mass, particularly preferably at least 20% by mass, more preferably at most 50% by mass, more preferably at most 40% by mass, and at most 30% by mass. More preferably, it is particularly preferably 20% by mass or less.
- OD optical density
- the content ratio of carbon black to (a) the colorant is preferably 5% by mass or more, more preferably 10% by mass or more, and more preferably 15% by mass or more. Is more preferably 20% by mass or more, more preferably 50% by mass or less, more preferably 40% by mass or less, and further preferably 35% by mass or less. It is preferably 30% by mass or less.
- OD optical density
- the content rate of alkali-soluble resin is 5 mass% or more normally with respect to the total solid of the photosensitive coloring composition of this invention, Preferably it is 10 mass% or more, More preferably, it is 20 mass% or more, More preferably, it is 25 It is usually 85% by mass or less, preferably 80% by mass or less, more preferably 70% by mass or less, further preferably 60% by mass or less, still more preferably 50% by mass or less, and particularly preferably 40% by mass. It is as follows. (B) By making the content rate of alkali-soluble resin more than the said lower limit, there exists a tendency which can suppress the fall of the solubility with respect to the developing solution of an unexposed part, and can suppress image development defect. Moreover, by setting it as the said upper limit or less, there exists a tendency which can suppress that the permeability
- the content of (bI) epoxy (meth) acrylate resin is usually 3% by mass or more, preferably 6% by mass or more, more preferably 8% by mass or more, based on the total solid content of the photosensitive coloring composition of the present invention. It is usually 40% by mass or less, preferably 30% by mass or less, more preferably 20% by mass or less, and further preferably 15% by mass or less. There is a tendency that reliability can be ensured by setting it to the lower limit value or more, and there is a tendency that surface smoothness can be ensured by setting the upper limit value or less.
- the content of the (b-I) epoxy (meth) acrylate resin contained in the alkali-soluble resin is usually 10% by mass or more, preferably 20% by mass or more, more preferably 25% by mass or more, and further preferably 30%. % By mass or more, particularly preferably 40% by mass or more, and usually 90% by mass or less, preferably 80% by mass or less, more preferably 70% by mass or less, still more preferably 60% by mass or less, and still more preferably 50% by mass. Hereinafter, it is particularly preferably 40% by mass or less. There is a tendency that reliability can be ensured by setting it to the lower limit value or more, and there is a tendency that surface smoothness can be ensured by setting the upper limit value or less.
- the content ratio of (b-II) (meth) acrylic copolymer resin is usually 1% by mass or more, preferably 3% by mass or more, more preferably 6% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the photosensitive coloring composition of the present invention. More preferably, it is 8% by mass or more, usually 40% by mass or less, preferably 30% by mass or less, more preferably 20% by mass or less, and further preferably 15% by mass or less. There exists a tendency which can ensure surface smoothness by setting it as the said lower limit or more, and there exists a tendency which can ensure reliability by setting it as the said upper limit or less.
- the content of the (b-II) (meth) acrylic copolymer resin contained in the alkali-soluble resin is usually 10% by mass or more, preferably 20% by mass or more, more preferably 25% by mass or more, and further preferably 30% by mass or more, particularly preferably 40% by mass or more, usually 80% by mass or less, preferably 70% by mass or less, more preferably 60% by mass or less, still more preferably 50% by mass or less, particularly preferably 40% by mass. It is as follows. There exists a tendency which can ensure surface smoothness by setting it as the said lower limit or more, and there exists a tendency which can ensure reliability by setting it as the said upper limit or less.
- the content rate of a photoinitiator is 0.1 mass% or more normally with respect to the total solid of the photosensitive coloring composition of this invention, Preferably it is 0.5 mass% or more, More preferably, it is 1 mass% or more. More preferably 2% by mass or more, still more preferably 3% by mass or more, particularly preferably 4% by mass or more, and usually 15% by mass or less, preferably 10% by mass or less, more preferably 8% by mass or less, Preferably it is 7 mass% or less.
- the content ratio of the polymerization accelerator is preferably 0.05% by mass or more with respect to the total solid content of the photosensitive coloring composition of the present invention. 10% by mass or less, preferably 5% by mass or less.
- the polymerization accelerator is usually 0.1 to 50 parts by mass, particularly 0.1 to 20 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the photopolymerization initiator (c). It is preferable to use in proportion.
- the blending ratio of the sensitizing dye in the photosensitive coloring composition of the present invention is usually 20% by mass or less, preferably 15% by mass or less, based on the total solid content in the photosensitive coloring composition from the viewpoint of sensitivity. Preferably it is 10 mass% or less.
- the content ratio of the ethylenically unsaturated compound is usually 30% by mass or less, preferably 20% by mass or less, more preferably 15% by mass or less, based on the total solid content of the photosensitive coloring composition of the present invention.
- (D) By making the content rate of an ethylenically unsaturated compound below the said upper limit, it becomes the tendency which suppresses that the permeability of the developing solution to an exposure part becomes high, and obtains a favorable image easily. is there.
- the lower limit of the content rate of (d) ethylenically unsaturated compound is 1 mass% or more normally, Preferably it is 5 mass% or more.
- the photosensitive coloring composition of the present invention has a solid content concentration of usually 5% by mass or more, preferably 10% by mass or more, more preferably 15% by mass or more, even more preferably, by using (e) a solvent. Is adjusted to be 20% by mass or more, and usually 50% by mass or less, preferably 30% by mass or less.
- the content of the dispersant is usually 1% by mass or more, preferably 3% by mass or more, more preferably 5% by mass or more, and usually 30% by mass or less in the solid content of the photosensitive coloring composition. 20 mass% or less is preferable, 15 mass% or less is more preferable, and 10 mass% or less is further more preferable. Further, the content ratio of (f) dispersant to 100 parts by mass of (a) colorant is usually 5 parts by mass or more, more preferably 10 parts by mass or more, further preferably 15 parts by mass or more, and usually 50 parts by mass or less. In particular, it is preferably 30 parts by mass or less.
- the content is usually 0.1 to 5% by mass, preferably 0.2 to 3% by mass, more preferably 0.4%, based on the total solid content in the photosensitive coloring composition. ⁇ 2% by weight.
- the effect of improving the adhesion can be sufficiently obtained by setting the content ratio of the adhesion improver to the above lower limit value or more, and the sensitivity is lowered by setting it to the upper limit value or less, or a residue remains after development. There exists a tendency which can suppress becoming a defect.
- the content is usually 0.001 to 10% by mass, preferably 0.005 to 1% by mass, and more preferably 0% with respect to the total solid content in the photosensitive coloring composition. 0.01 to 0.5% by mass, most preferably 0.03 to 0.3% by mass.
- the photosensitive coloring composition of the present invention can be suitably used for forming a colored spacer, and is preferably black from the viewpoint of being used as a colored spacer.
- the optical density (OD) per 1 ⁇ m thickness of the coating film obtained by curing the photosensitive coloring composition is preferably 1.0 or more, more preferably 1.2 or more, and 1.5 or more. More preferably, it is particularly preferably 1.8 or more, usually 4.0 or less, preferably 3.0 or less, and more preferably 2.5 or less.
- the photosensitive coloring composition of the present invention (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “resist”) is produced according to a conventional method.
- the colorant is preferably dispersed in advance using a paint conditioner, a sand grinder, a ball mill, a roll mill, a stone mill, a jet mill, a homogenizer or the like. Since the colorant (a) is finely divided by the dispersion treatment, the resist coating characteristics are improved.
- the dispersion treatment is usually preferably carried out in a system in which a part or all of (a) a colorant, (e) a solvent, (f) a dispersant, and (b) an alkali-soluble resin are used together (hereinafter referred to as dispersion).
- the mixture subjected to the treatment and the composition obtained by the treatment may be referred to as “ink” or “pigment dispersion”.
- a polymer dispersant as the dispersant (f) because the resulting ink and resist are prevented from thickening with time (excellent in dispersion stability).
- a pigment dispersion containing at least (a) a colorant, (e) a solvent, and (f) a dispersant.
- a colorant e) organic solvent, and (f) dispersant that can be used in the pigment dispersion
- those described as those that can be used in the photosensitive coloring composition are preferably employed. Can do.
- a dispersion treatment when a dispersion treatment is performed on a liquid containing all components to be blended in the photosensitive coloring composition, a highly reactive component may be modified due to heat generated during the dispersion treatment. Therefore, it is preferable to perform the dispersion treatment in a system containing a polymer dispersant.
- the colorant is dispersed with a sand grinder, glass beads or zirconia beads having a particle diameter of about 0.1 to 8 mm are preferably used.
- the temperature is usually from 0 ° C. to 100 ° C., and preferably from room temperature to 80 ° C.
- the dispersion time is appropriately adjusted because the appropriate time varies depending on the composition of the liquid and the size of the dispersion treatment apparatus.
- the standard of dispersion is to control the gloss of the ink so that the 20-degree specular gloss (JIS Z8741) of the resist is in the range of 50 to 300.
- the dispersion treatment is not sufficient, and rough pigment (coloring material) particles often remain, which may result in insufficient developability, adhesion, resolution, and the like.
- the dispersion treatment is performed until the gloss value exceeds the above range, the pigment is crushed and a large number of ultrafine particles are generated, so that the dispersion stability tends to be impaired.
- the dispersed particle diameter of the pigment dispersed in the ink is usually 0.03 to 0.3 ⁇ m, and is measured by a dynamic light scattering method or the like.
- the ink obtained by the dispersion treatment and the other components contained in the resist are mixed to obtain a uniform solution.
- fine dust is often mixed in the liquid, and thus the obtained resist is preferably filtered by a filter or the like.
- a cured product can be obtained by curing the photosensitive coloring composition of the present invention.
- a cured product obtained by curing the photosensitive coloring composition can be suitably used as a colored spacer.
- the material thereof is not particularly limited.
- Transparent substrates are mainly used.
- materials include polyester resins such as polyethylene terephthalate, polyolefin resins such as polypropylene and polyethylene, sheets made of thermoplastic resins such as polycarbonate, polymethyl methacrylate, and polysulfone, and epoxy.
- thermosetting resin sheets such as resins, unsaturated polyester resins, poly (meth) acrylic resins, and various glasses.
- glass and heat resistant resin are preferable from the viewpoint of heat resistance.
- a transparent electrode such as ITO or IZO is formed on the surface of the substrate. Other than the transparent substrate, it can be formed on the TFT array.
- the support may be subjected to corona discharge treatment, ozone treatment, silane coupling agent, thin film formation treatment of various resins such as urethane resin, etc., if necessary, in order to improve surface properties such as adhesiveness.
- the thickness of the transparent substrate is usually 0.05 to 10 mm, preferably 0.1 to 7 mm. When a thin film forming process of various resins is performed, the film thickness is usually 0.01 to 10 ⁇ m, preferably 0.05 to 5 ⁇ m.
- the photosensitive colored composition of the present invention is used for the same applications as known photosensitive colored compositions for color filters. Hereinafter, it is used as a colored spacer (black photospacer). The method for forming a black photospacer using the photosensitive coloring composition of the present invention will be described below.
- a photosensitive coloring composition is supplied in a film shape or a pattern shape by a method such as coating on a substrate on which a black photospacer is to be provided, and the solvent is dried. Subsequently, pattern formation is performed by a method such as exposure-development photolithography. Thereafter, a black photo spacer is formed on the substrate by performing additional exposure or thermosetting treatment as necessary.
- the photosensitive coloring composition of the present invention is usually supplied onto a substrate in a state of being dissolved or dispersed in a solvent.
- a conventionally known method such as a spinner method, a wire bar method, a flow coating method, a die coating method, a roll coating method, a spray coating method, or the like can be used. Further, it may be supplied in a pattern by an inkjet method or a printing method. Above all, the die coating method reduces the amount of coating solution used, and has no influence from mist adhering to the spin coating method. It is preferable from the viewpoint.
- the coating amount varies depending on the application, but in the case of a black photospacer, for example, the dry film thickness is usually in the range of 0.5 ⁇ m to 10 ⁇ m, preferably 1 ⁇ m to 9 ⁇ m, particularly preferably 1 ⁇ m to 7 ⁇ m.
- the dry film thickness or the height of the finally formed spacer is uniform over the entire area of the substrate. When the variation is large, a nonuniformity defect occurs in the liquid crystal panel.
- the final height of the black photo spacers is different.
- a known substrate such as a glass substrate can be used as the substrate.
- the substrate surface is preferably a flat surface.
- Drying method Drying after supplying the photosensitive coloring composition solution onto the substrate is preferably performed by a drying method using a hot plate, an IR oven, or a convection oven. Moreover, you may combine the reduced pressure drying method of drying in a reduced pressure chamber, without raising temperature.
- Drying conditions can be appropriately selected according to the type of solvent component and the performance of the dryer used.
- the drying time is usually selected within a range of 15 seconds to 5 minutes at a temperature of 40 ° C. to 130 ° C., preferably 50 ° C. to 110 ° C., depending on the type of solvent component and the performance of the dryer used.
- the temperature is selected in the range of 30 seconds to 3 minutes.
- Exposure is performed by superposing a negative mask pattern on the coating film of the photosensitive coloring composition, and irradiating with an ultraviolet light source or a visible light source through this mask pattern.
- the exposure mask is placed close to the coating film of the photosensitive coloring composition, or the exposure mask is arranged at a position away from the coating film of the photosensitive coloring composition.
- a method of projecting exposure light through a mask may be used. Further, a scanning exposure method using a laser beam without using a mask pattern may be used.
- the exposure is performed in a deoxygenated atmosphere or after forming an oxygen blocking layer such as a polyvinyl alcohol layer on the photopolymerizable layer. Or you may.
- a light shielding portion (light transmittance 0%) and a plurality of openings have the highest average light transmittance.
- An exposure mask having an opening (intermediate transmission opening) having a small average light transmittance with respect to a high opening (complete transmission opening) is used.
- a difference in the residual film ratio is caused by a difference in average light transmittance between the intermediate transmission opening and the complete transmission opening, that is, a difference in exposure amount.
- a method of producing the intermediate transmission opening by a matrix-shaped light shielding pattern having a minute polygonal light shielding unit is known.
- a method of controlling the light transmittance with a film of a material such as chromium, molybdenum, tungsten, or silicon as the absorber is known.
- the light source used for the above exposure is not particularly limited.
- the light source include a xenon lamp, a halogen lamp, a tungsten lamp, a high-pressure mercury lamp, an ultra-high pressure mercury lamp, a metal halide lamp, a medium-pressure mercury lamp, a low-pressure mercury lamp, a carbon arc, and a fluorescent lamp, an argon ion laser, a YAG laser,
- laser light sources such as excimer laser, nitrogen laser, helium cadmium laser, blue-violet semiconductor laser, and near infrared semiconductor laser.
- An optical filter can also be used when used by irradiating light of a specific wavelength.
- the optical filter may be of a type that can control the light transmittance at the exposure wavelength with a thin film, for example, and the material in that case is, for example, a Cr compound (Cr oxide, nitride, oxynitride, fluoride, etc.), Examples include MoSi, Si, W, and Al.
- a Cr compound Cr oxide, nitride, oxynitride, fluoride, etc.
- Energy of exposure generally, 1 mJ / cm 2 or more, preferably 5 mJ / cm 2 or more, more preferably 10 mJ / cm 2 or more, usually 300 mJ / cm 2 or less, preferably 200 mJ / cm 2 or less, more preferably 150 mJ / cm 2 or less.
- the distance between the exposure target and the mask pattern is usually 10 ⁇ m or more, preferably 50 ⁇ m or more, more preferably 75 ⁇ m or more, and usually 500 ⁇ m or less, preferably 400 ⁇ m or less, more preferably 300 ⁇ m or less.
- an image pattern can be formed on the substrate by development using an aqueous solution of an alkaline compound or an organic solvent.
- This aqueous solution may further contain a surfactant, an organic solvent, a buffering agent, a complexing agent, a dye or a pigment.
- Alkaline compounds include sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, lithium hydroxide, sodium carbonate, potassium carbonate, sodium bicarbonate, potassium bicarbonate, sodium silicate, potassium silicate, sodium metasilicate, sodium phosphate, potassium phosphate
- Inorganic alkaline compounds such as sodium hydrogen phosphate, potassium hydrogen phosphate, sodium dihydrogen phosphate, potassium dihydrogen phosphate, ammonium hydroxide, mono-, di- or triethanolamine, mono-, di- or trimethylamine , Mono-, di- or triethylamine, mono- or diisopropylamine, n-butylamine, mono-, di- or triisopropanolamine, ethyleneimine, ethylenediimine, tetramethylammonium hydroxide (TMAH), choline, etc.
- Organic alkaline compounds may be a mixture of two or more.
- surfactant examples include nonionic surfactants such as polyoxyethylene alkyl ethers, polyoxyethylene alkyl aryl ethers, polyoxyethylene alkyl esters, sorbitan alkyl esters, monoglyceride alkyl esters; Anionic surfactants such as acid salts, alkylnaphthalene sulfonates, alkyl sulfates, alkyl sulfonates, sulfosuccinic acid ester salts; amphoteric surfactants such as alkylbetaines and amino acids.
- nonionic surfactants such as polyoxyethylene alkyl ethers, polyoxyethylene alkyl aryl ethers, polyoxyethylene alkyl esters, sorbitan alkyl esters, monoglyceride alkyl esters
- Anionic surfactants such as acid salts, alkylnaphthalene sulfonates, alkyl sulfates, alkyl sulfon
- organic solvent examples include isopropyl alcohol, benzyl alcohol, ethyl cellosolve, butyl cellosolve, phenyl cellosolve, propylene glycol, diacetone alcohol and the like.
- the organic solvent can be used alone or in combination with an aqueous solution.
- the development processing conditions are not particularly limited, and the development temperature is usually in the range of 10 to 50 ° C., particularly 15 to 45 ° C., particularly preferably 20 to 40 ° C.
- the development methods are immersion development, spray development, brush Any of a developing method, an ultrasonic developing method and the like can be used.
- thermosetting treatment The substrate after development may be subjected to additional exposure by a method similar to the above exposure method, if necessary, or may be subjected to thermosetting treatment.
- the thermosetting treatment conditions are such that the temperature is selected in the range of 100 ° C. to 280 ° C., preferably in the range of 150 ° C. to 250 ° C., and the time is selected in the range of 5 minutes to 60 minutes.
- the size and shape of the colored spacer of the present invention are appropriately adjusted depending on the specifications of the color filter to which the colored spacer is applied, but the photosensitive colored composition of the present invention is particularly suitable for the height of the spacer and the sub-spacer by photolithography. It is useful for simultaneously forming different black photo spacers, in which case the height of the spacer is usually about 2 to 7 ⁇ m, and the sub-spacer is usually about 0.2 to 1.5 ⁇ m lower than the spacer.
- the optical density (OD) per 1 ⁇ m of the colored spacer of the present invention is preferably 1.2 or more, more preferably 1.5 or more, further preferably 1.8 or more, from the viewpoint of light-shielding properties. It is 0 or less, and preferably 3.0 or less.
- the optical density (OD) is a value measured by a method described later.
- the color filter of the present invention is provided with the colored spacer of the present invention as described above.
- a black matrix, a red, green, and blue pixel coloring layer, and an overcoat layer are stacked to form a colored spacer, and then an alignment film is formed.
- the liquid crystal provided with the colored spacer of the present invention is formed by bonding the color filter having the colored spacer of the present invention and the liquid crystal driving side substrate to form a liquid crystal cell, and injecting the liquid crystal into the formed liquid crystal cell.
- An image display device such as a display device can be manufactured.
- the inside of the reaction vessel was changed to air substitution, 0.7 parts by mass of trisdimethylaminomethylphenol and 0.12 parts by mass of hydroquinone were added to 43.2 parts by mass of acrylic acid, and the reaction was continued at 100 ° C. for 12 hours. Thereafter, 56.2 parts by mass of tetrahydrophthalic anhydride (THPA) and 0.7 parts by mass of triethylamine were added and reacted at 100 ° C. for 3.5 hours.
- THPA tetrahydrophthalic anhydride
- the weight average molecular weight Mw measured by GPC of the alkali-soluble resin-A thus obtained was about 8400, and the acid value was 80 mgKOH / g.
- ⁇ Alkali-soluble resin-B> A mixed liquid of 217.6 parts by mass of propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate and 53.9 parts by mass of propylene glycol monomethyl ether was stirred while replacing with nitrogen, and the temperature was raised to 120 ° C.
- a mixed solution of 3.8 parts by mass of methylbutyronitrile was added dropwise over 3 hours, and stirring was further continued at 90 ° C. for 2 hours.
- the alkali-soluble resin-B thus obtained had a weight average molecular weight Mw of 16,500 and an acid value of 176 mgKOH / g.
- ⁇ Alkali-soluble resin-C> A mixed liquid of 303.5 parts by mass of propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate and 75.9 parts by mass of propylene glycol monomethyl ether was stirred while replacing with nitrogen, and the temperature was raised to 120 ° C.
- a mixed solution of 8.7 parts by mass of butyronitrile was added dropwise over 3 hours, and the mixture was further stirred at 90 ° C. for 2 hours.
- the alkali-soluble resin-C thus obtained had a weight average molecular weight Mw of 7200 and an acid value of 86 mgKOH / g.
- TMP trimethylolpropane
- BPDA biphenyltetracarboxylic dianhydride
- THPA tetrahydrophthalic anhydride
- the resin solution When the resin solution became transparent, it was diluted with methoxybutyl acetate to prepare a solid content of 50% by mass, acid value 113 mgKOH / g, weight average molecular weight (Mw) 2600 in terms of polystyrene measured by GPC, double A carboxyl group-containing epoxy methacrylate resin (alkali-soluble resin-E) having a binding equivalent of 520 g / mol was obtained.
- ⁇ Alkali-soluble resin-F> A mixed solution of 214.5 parts by mass of propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate and 53.6 parts by mass of propylene glycol monomethyl ether was stirred while replacing with nitrogen, and the temperature was raised to 120 ° C.
- a mixture of 1.4 parts by mass of methylbutyronitrile was added dropwise over 3 hours, and the mixture was further stirred at 90 ° C. for 2 hours.
- the alkali-soluble resin-F thus obtained had a weight average molecular weight Mw of 44100 and an acid value of 130 mgKOH / g.
- ⁇ Alkali-soluble resin-G> A mixture of 210.1 parts by mass of propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate and 52.5 parts by mass of propylene glycol monomethyl ether was stirred while replacing with nitrogen, and the temperature was raised to 120 ° C.
- a mixed solution of 3.3 parts by mass of methylbutyronitrile was dropped over 3 hours, and stirring was further continued at 90 ° C. for 2 hours.
- the alkali-soluble resin-G thus obtained had a weight average molecular weight Mw of 19100 and an acid value of 198 mgKOH / g.
- the A block of Dispersant-I contains repeating units of the following formulas (1a) and (2a), and the B block contains repeating units of the following formula (3a).
- the content of the repeating units of the following formulas (1a), (2a), and (3a) in all the repeating units of Dispersant-I is 11.1 mol%, 22.2 mol%, and 6.7 mol%, respectively. is there.
- DPHA Dipentaerythritol hexaacrylate manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.
- KAYAMER PM-21 phosphate containing methacryloyl group manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.
- optical density per unit film thickness was measured by the following procedure. First, the prepared photosensitive coloring composition was applied to a glass substrate with a spin coater so that the final film thickness was 2 ⁇ m, dried under reduced pressure for 1 minute, and then dried at a hot plate temperature of 80 ° C. for 70 seconds. After passing through the exposure and development steps, a resist coated substrate was obtained by heating at an oven temperature of 230 ° C. for 20 minutes.
- the optical density (OD) of the obtained substrate was measured with a transmission densitometer Gretag Macbeth D200-II, and the film thickness was measured with a non-contact surface / layer cross-sectional shape measurement system VertScan (R) 2.0 manufactured by Ryoka System.
- the optical density per unit film thickness was calculated from the optical density (OD) and the film thickness.
- the OD value is a numerical value indicating the light shielding ability, and the larger the numerical value, the higher the light shielding property.
- NMP dissolution test The N-methylpyrrolidone (NMP) dissolution test was performed according to the following procedure. First, the prepared photosensitive coloring composition was applied to a glass substrate with a spin coater so that the final film thickness was 2 ⁇ m, dried under reduced pressure for 1 minute, and then dried at a hot plate temperature of 80 ° C. for 70 seconds. After passing through the exposure and development steps, it was heated at an oven temperature of 230 ° C. for 20 minutes to obtain a resist-coated substrate. Two measurement substrates (2.5 cm ⁇ 1.0 cm square) were cut out from the prepared resist-coated substrate and immersed in a 10 mL vial containing 8 mL of N-methylpyrrolidone (NMP).
- NMP N-methylpyrrolidone
- the NMP elution test was implemented in the state which left the vial container containing the board
- the sample solution (NMP elution solution) was placed in a 1 cm square quartz cell and measured. Absorbance is a dimensionless quantity indicating how much light intensity is attenuated when light passes through an object in spectroscopy, and is defined by the following equation.
- a (absorbance) ⁇ log 10 (I / I 0 ) (I: transmitted light intensity, I 0 : incident light intensity)
- the light intensity transmitted through the NMP single solution can be regarded as I 0, and the light intensity transmitted through the sample solution can be regarded as I. Therefore, (I / I 0 ) in the above formula represents the light transmittance, and the absorbance A is a value obtained by logarithmically expressing the reciprocal of the transmittance.
- the spectrum area (nm) of the measured absorbance was calculated, and the NMP resistance was evaluated by setting the area value less than 20 (nm) to ⁇ and 20 (nm) or more to x.
- the spectral area of absorbance which is the evaluation criterion, can be expressed as the sum of absorbance at each wavelength, and means the total sum of the eluted resist components.
- NMP resistance evaluation criteria Judgment based on spectral area value of absorbance (wavelength 300 to 800 nm) ⁇ : Less than 20 (nm) ⁇ : 20 (nm) or more
- ⁇ Evaluation of surface roughness> With respect to the resist coated substrate prepared in the above ⁇ Evaluation of surface smoothness>, a three-dimensional non-contact surface shape measurement system Micromap manufactured by Ryoka System Co., Ltd. is used with a 50 ⁇ optical lens and 70 ⁇ m ⁇ 70 ⁇ m in Focus mode. The surface roughness Sa (arithmetic mean roughness, ⁇ m) was measured in the visual field.
- ⁇ Preparation of pigment dispersions 1, 3 and 4> The pigment, dispersant, dispersion aid, alkali-soluble resin, and solvent described in Table 1 were mixed so that the mass ratio described in Table 1 was obtained. This mixed solution was subjected to a dispersion treatment in the range of 25 to 45 ° C. for 3 hours using a paint shaker. As the beads, 0.5 mm ⁇ zirconia beads were used, and 2.5 times the mass of the dispersion was added. After the dispersion was completed, the beads and the dispersion were separated by a filter to prepare pigment dispersions 1, 3, and 4.
- Carbon black was produced by a normal oil furnace method. However, as the raw material oil, an ethylene bottom oil having a small amount of Na, Ca, and S was used, and a coke oven gas was used for combustion. Furthermore, pure water treated with an ion exchange resin was used as the reaction stop water. 540 g of the obtained carbon black was stirred at 5,000 to 6,000 rpm for 30 minutes together with 14500 g of pure water using a homomixer to obtain a slurry.
- the slurry was transferred to a container with a screw type stirrer, and 600 g of toluene in which 60 g of epoxy resin “Epicoat 828” (manufactured by Mitsubishi Chemical Corporation) was dissolved was added little by little while mixing at about 1,000 rpm. In about 15 minutes, the entire amount of carbon black dispersed in water was transferred to the toluene side, and became particles of about 1 mm.
- Examples 1 to 6, Comparative Examples 1 to 3 Each component was added so that the solid content ratio was the blending ratio shown in Table 2, and PGMEA was further added so that the solid content was 22% by mass, followed by stirring and dissolution to prepare a photosensitive coloring composition.
- the solid content ratio of the prepared composition is shown in Table 2.
- Table 2 shows the evaluation results of the unit OD value, NMP dissolution test, surface smoothness and surface roughness measured by the above-described method.
- the mass part of the photosensitive coloring composition in Table 2 represents a mass part of solid content.
- the main resin component is (b-I) epoxy (meth) acrylate resin as in Comparative Example 2, it is considered that the surface smoothness becomes poor due to the heat flow resulting from the structure. Therefore, in addition to the epoxy (meth) acrylate resin, by using a (meth) acrylic copolymer resin containing a repeating unit derived from an unsaturated carboxylic acid that is difficult to heat flow, the heat flow is reduced and the surface smoothness is improved. it is conceivable that. However, since such (meth) acrylic copolymer resins are generally less sensitive than epoxy (meth) acrylate resins, curability is reduced and reliability may deteriorate as in Comparative Example 1. is there.
- the photosensitive coloring composition of the present invention it is possible to provide a cured product and a colored spacer that have high light-shielding properties, high reliability, and excellent surface smoothness, and an image display including such a colored spacer.
- An apparatus can be provided. Therefore, the present invention has very high industrial applicability in the fields of photosensitive coloring composition, cured product, coloring spacer and image display device.
Landscapes
- Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
- General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- Nonlinear Science (AREA)
- Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
- Optics & Photonics (AREA)
- Polymers & Plastics (AREA)
- Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
- Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
- Organic Chemistry (AREA)
- Spectroscopy & Molecular Physics (AREA)
- Crystallography & Structural Chemistry (AREA)
- Mathematical Physics (AREA)
- Architecture (AREA)
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Structural Engineering (AREA)
- Materials For Photolithography (AREA)
- Optical Filters (AREA)
- Liquid Crystal (AREA)
- Graft Or Block Polymers (AREA)
- Polymerisation Methods In General (AREA)
Abstract
Description
また、特許文献3に記載されている感光性着色組成物を用いて遮光性の高い着色スペーサーを形成した場合、その上層膜となる配向膜を形成する際の溶剤に、着色剤由来の不純物が溶出することに加え、高顔料濃度で硬化成分が少ないことに起因して不純物の溶出も多く、その結果、LCDの表示信頼性を悪化させるといった問題があることが見出された。
本発明は、上記事情に鑑みてなされたものであり、本発明は、遮光性が高く、高信頼性かつ表面平滑性に優れたパターンを形成することが可能な感光性着色組成物を提供することを目的とする。
すなわち、本発明は以下の[1]~[9]の構成を有する。
前記(a)着色剤が、有機顔料及びカーボンブラックを含み、
前記(b)アルカリ可溶性樹脂が、(b-I)エポキシ(メタ)アクリレート樹脂と、(b-II)側鎖にエチレン性不飽和結合を有する繰り返し単位α及び不飽和カルボン酸由来の繰り返し単位βを含有する(メタ)アクリル共重合樹脂とを含み、かつ、
前記(b-II)(メタ)アクリル共重合樹脂における前記繰り返し単位αの含有割合が12モル%以上であることを特徴とする感光性着色組成物。
R12、R13、R14、R15、R17、R18、R19およびR20は他の全てから互いに独立して水素原子、ハロゲン原子、R21、COOH、COOR21、COO-、CONH2、CONHR21、CONR21R22、CN、OH、OR21、COCR21、OCONH2、OCONHR21、OCONR21R22、NO2、NH2、NHR21、NR21R22、NHCOR22、NR21COR22、N=CH2、N=CHR21、N=CR21R22、SH、SR21、SOR21、SO2R21、SO3R21、SO3H、SO3 -、SO2NH2、SO2NHR21またはSO2NR21R22である;
且つ、R12とR13、R13とR14、R14とR15、R17とR18、R18とR19、及びR19とR20からなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1つの組み合わせは、互いに直接結合し、または酸素原子、硫黄原子、NH若しくはNR21ブリッジによって互いに結合することもできる;
R21およびR22は互いに独立して、炭素数1~12のアルキル基、炭素数3~12のシクロアルキル基、炭素数2~12のアルケニル基、炭素数3~12のシクロアルケニル基または炭素数2~12のアルキニル基である。)
前記(a)着色剤が、赤色顔料及び橙色顔料からなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1種と、青色顔料及び紫色顔料からなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1種を含み、
前記(b)アルカリ可溶性樹脂が、(b-I)エポキシ(メタ)アクリレート樹脂と、(b-II)側鎖にエチレン性不飽和結合を有する繰り返し単位α及び不飽和カルボン酸由来の繰り返し単位βを含有する(メタ)アクリル共重合樹脂とを含み、かつ、
前記(b-II)(メタ)アクリル共重合樹脂における前記繰り返し単位αの含有割合が12モル%以上であることを特徴とする感光性着色組成物。
[4] 前記繰り返し単位αが、下記一般式(I)で表される化学構造を有する、[1]~[3]のいずれか1つに記載の感光性着色組成物。
[5] 前記(b-II)(メタ)アクリル共重合樹脂の含有割合が、感光性着色組成物中の全固形分に対して1質量%以上である、[1]~[4]のいずれか1つに記載の感光性着色組成物。
[6] 硬化した塗膜の膜厚1μm当たりの光学濃度が1.0以上である、[1]~[5]のいずれか1つに記載の感光性着色組成物。
[7] [1]~[6]のいずれか1つに記載の感光性着色組成物を硬化して得られる硬化物。
[8] [7]に記載の硬化物から形成される着色スペーサー。
[9] [8]に記載の着色スペーサーを備える画像表示装置。
なお、本発明において、「(メタ)アクリル」とは「アクリル及び/又はメタクリル」を意味し、「(メタ)アクリレート」、「(メタ)アクリロイル」についても同様である。
本発明において「全固形分」とは、感光性着色組成物中又は後述するインク中に含まれる、溶剤以外の全成分を意味するものとする。
本発明において、「重量平均分子量」とは、GPC(ゲルパーミエーションクロマトグラフィー)によるポリスチレン換算の重量平均分子量(Mw)をさす。
また、本発明において、「アミン価」とは、特に断りのない限り、有効固形分換算のアミン価を表し、分散剤の固形分1gあたりの塩基量と当量のKOHの質量で表される値である。なお、測定方法については後述する。一方、「酸価」とは、特に断りのない限り有効固形分換算の酸価を表し、中和滴定により算出される。
本発明の感光性着色組成物は、
(a)着色剤
(b)アルカリ可溶性樹脂
(c)光重合開始剤
(d)エチレン性不飽和化合物
(e)溶剤
(f)分散剤
を必須成分として含有し、必要に応じて、更にシランカップリング剤等の密着向上剤、塗布性向上剤、現像改良剤、紫外線吸収剤、酸化防止剤、界面活性剤、顔料誘導体等、その他の配合成分を含むものであり、通常、各配合成分が、溶剤に溶解又は分散した状態で使用される。
以下、特に断りがない限り、「本発明の感光性着色組成物」は、前記第1の態様に係る感光性着色組成物、第2の態様に係る感光性着色組成物、及び第3の態様に係る感光性着色組成物の全てを指す。
本発明の感光性着色組成物で用いる(a)着色剤は、感光性着色組成物やそれを硬化して得られる硬化物を着色できる色材であれば特に限定されず、例えば顔料や染料が挙げられ、耐久性の観点からは顔料を好ましく用いることができる。
顔料としては有機顔料や無機顔料が挙げられ、液晶の電圧保持率の低下を抑制し、また、紫外線の吸収を抑制して形状や段差をコントロールしやすくするとの観点からは、有機顔料を用いることが好ましい。
有機顔料の種類は特に限定されないが、密着性の観点から、赤色顔料、橙色顔料、青色顔料及び紫色顔料からなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1種の有機着色顔料を含有することが好ましい。また、遮光性の観点から、有機黒色顔料を含有することが好ましい。
なお、分散性や遮光性の点で、C.I.ピグメントブルー15:6、16、60を用いることが好ましく、紫外線で硬化させる場合には青色顔料としては紫外線吸収率の低いものを使用することが好ましく、かかる観点からはC.I.ピグメントブルー60を用いることがより好ましい。
なお、分散性や遮光性の点で、C.I.ピグメントバイオレット23、29を用いることが好ましく、紫外線で硬化させる場合には紫色顔料としては紫外線吸収率の低いものを使用することが好ましく、係る観点からはC.I.ピグメントバイオレット29を用いることがより好ましい。
緑色顔料としては、C.I.ピグメントグリーン1、2、4、7、8、10、13、14、15、17、18、19、26、36、45、48、50、51、54、55を挙げることができる。この中でも、好ましくはC.I.ピグメントグリーン7、36を挙げることができる。
黄色顔料としては、C.I.ピグメントイエロー1、1:1、2、3、4、5、6、9、10、12、13、14、16、17、24、31、32、34、35、35:1、36、36:1、37、37:1、40、41、42、43、48、53、55、61、62、62:1、63、65、73、74、75、81、83、87、93、94、95、97、100、101、104、105、108、109、110、111、116、117、119、120、126、127、127:1、128、129、133、134、136、138、139、142、147、148、150、151、153、154、155、157、158、159、160、161、162、163、164、165、166、167、168、169、170、172、173、174、175、176、180、181、182、183、184、185、188、189、190、191、191:1、192、193、194、195、196、197、198、199、200、202、203、204、205、206、207、208を挙げることができる。この中でも、好ましくはC.I.ピグメントイエロー83、117、129、138、139、150、154、155、180、185、更に好ましくはC.I.ピグメントイエロー83、138、139、150、180を挙げることができる。
赤色顔料:C.I.ピグメントレッド177、254、272
橙色顔料:C.I.ピグメントオレンジ43、64、72
青色顔料:C.I.ピグメントブルー15:6、60
紫色顔料:C.I.ピグメントバイオレット23、29
(1)C.I.ピグメントレッド177、254から選ばれる少なくとも1種
(2)C.I.ピグメントオレンジ43、64から選ばれる少なくとも1種
(3)C.I.ピグメントブルー15:6、60から選ばれる少なくとも1種
(4)C.I.ピグメントバイオレッド23、29から選ばれる少なくとも1種
一方で、カーボンブラックを少量使用する場合には、遮光性の観点から、赤色顔料及び橙色顔料からなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1種と、青色顔料及び紫色顔料からなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1種とを含有することが好ましく、その具体的組み合わせ例としては、赤色顔料と青色顔料の組み合わせ、青色顔料と橙色顔料の組み合わせ、青色顔料と橙色顔料と紫色顔料の組み合わせなどが挙げられる。
一方で、有機着色顔料に替えて有機黒色顔料を用いることもできる。
デグサ社製:Printex(登録商標、以下同じ。)3、Printex3OP、Printex30、Printex30OP、Printex40、Printex45、Printex55、Printex60、Printex75、Printex80、Printex85、Printex90、Printex A、Printex L、Printex G、Printex P、Printex U、Printex V、PrintexG、SpecialBlack550、SpecialBlack350、SpecialBlack250、SpecialBlack100、SpecialBlack6、SpecialBlack5、SpecialBlack4、Color Black FW1、Color Black FW2、Color Black FW2V、Color Black FW18、Color Black FW18、Color Black FW200、Color Black S160、Color Black S170
キャボット社製:Monarch(登録商標、以下同じ。)120、Monarch280、Monarch460、Monarch800、Monarch880、Monarch900、Monarch1000、Monarch1100、Monarch1300、Monarch1400、Monarch4630、REGAL(登録商標、以下同じ。)99、REGAL99R、REGAL415、REGAL415R、REGAL250、REGAL250R、REGAL330、REGAL400R、REGAL55R0、REGAL660R、BLACK PEARLS480、PEARLS130、VULCAN(登録商標)XC72R、ELFTEX(登録商標)-8
コロンビヤン カーボン社製:RAVEN(登録商標、以下同じ。)11、RAVEN14、RAVEN15、RAVEN16、RAVEN22RAVEN30、RAVEN35、RAVEN40、RAVEN410、RAVEN420、RAVEN450、RAVEN500、RAVEN780、RAVEN850、RAVEN890H、RAVEN1000、RAVEN1020、RAVEN1040、RAVEN1060U、RAVEN1080U、RAVEN1170、RAVEN1190U、RAVEN1250、RAVEN1500、RAVEN2000、RAVEN2500U、RAVEN3500、RAVEN5000、RAVEN5250、RAVEN5750、RAVEN7000
具体的な合成樹脂としては、フェノール樹脂、メラミン樹脂、キシレン樹脂、ジアリルフタレート樹脂、グリプタル樹脂、エポキシ樹脂、アルキルベンゼン樹脂等の熱硬化性樹脂や、ポリスチレン、ポリカーボネート、ポリエチレンテレフタレート、ポリブチレンテレフタレート、変性ポリフェニレンオキサイド、ポリスルフォン、ポリパラフェニレンテレフタルアミド、ポリアミドイミド、ポリイミド、ポリアミノビスマレイミド、ポリエーテルスルフォポリフェニレンスルフォン、ポリアリレート、ポリエーテルエーテルケトン等の熱可塑性樹脂が使用できる。カーボンブラックに対する樹脂の被覆量は、カーボンブラックと樹脂の合計量に対し1~30質量%が好ましく、前記下限値以上とすることで被覆を十分なものとすることができる傾向がある。一方、前記上限値以下とすることで、樹脂同士の粘着を防ぎ、分散性が良好なものとすることができる傾向がある。
R12、R13、R14、R15、R17、R18、R19およびR20は他の全てから互いに独立して水素原子、ハロゲン原子、R21、COOH、COOR21、COO-、CONH2、CONHR21、CONR21R22、CN、OH、OR21、COCR21、OCONH2、OCONHR21、OCONR21R22、NO2、NH2、NHR21、NR21R22、NHCOR22、NR21COR22、N=CH2、N=CHR21、N=CR21R22、SH、SR21、SOR21、SO2R21、SO3R21、SO3H、SO3 -、SO2NH2、SO2NHR21またはSO2NR21R22である;
且つ、R12とR13、R13とR14、R14とR15、R17とR18、R18とR19、及びR19とR20からなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1つの組み合わせは、互いに直接結合し、または酸素原子、硫黄原子、NH若しくはNR21ブリッジによって互いに結合することもできる;
R21およびR22は互いに独立して、炭素数1~12のアルキル基、炭素数3~12のシクロアルキル基、炭素数2~12のアルケニル基、炭素数3~12のシクロアルケニル基または炭素数2~12のアルキニル基である。
R12、R14、R15、R17、R19およびR20は互いに独立して好ましくは水素原子、フッ素原子、または塩素原子であり、さらに好ましくは水素原子である。
R13およびR18は互いに独立して好ましくは水素原子、NO2、OCH3、OC2H5、臭素原子、塩素原子、CH3、C2H5、N(CH3)2、N(CH3)(C2H5)、N(C2H5)2、α-ナフチル、β-ナフチル、SO3HまたはSO3 -であり、さらに好ましくは水素原子またはSO3Hである。
好ましくは、R11とR16、R12とR17、R13とR18、R14とR19、およびR15とR20からなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1つの組み合わせが同一であり、より好ましくは、R11はR16と同一であり、R12はR17と同一であり、R13はR18と同一であり、R14はR19と同一であり、かつ、R15はR20と同一である。
この有機黒色顔料は、好ましくは後述される分散剤、溶剤、方法によって分散して使用される。また、分散の際に前記一般式(2)のスルホン酸誘導体が存在すると、分散性や保存性が向上する場合がある。
アゾ系染料としては、例えば、C.I.アシッドイエロー11、C.I.アシッドオレンジ7、C.I.アシッドレッド37、C.I.アシッドレッド180、C.I.アシッドブルー29、C.I.ダイレクトレッド28、C.I.ダイレクトレッド83、C.I.ダイレクトイエロー12、C.I.ダイレクトオレンジ26、C.I.ダイレクトグリーン28、C.I.ダイレクトグリーン59、C.I.リアクティブイエロー2、C.I.リアクティブレッド17、C.I.リアクティブレッド120、C.I.リアクティブブラック5、C.I.ディスパースオレンジ5、C.I.ディスパースレッド58、C.I.ディスパースブルー165、C.I.ベーシックブルー41、C.I.ベーシックレッド18、C.I.モルダントレッド7、C.I.モルダントイエロー5、C.I.モルダントブラック7等が挙げられる。
この他、フタロシアニン系染料として、例えば、C.I.パッドブルー5等が、キノンイミン系染料として、例えば、C.I.ベーシックブルー3、C.I.ベーシックブルー9等が、キノリン系染料として、例えば、C.I.ソルベントイエロー33、C.I.アシッドイエロー3、C.I.ディスパースイエロー64等が、ニトロ系染料として、例えば、C.I.アシッドイエロー1、C.I.アシッドオレンジ3、C.I.ディスパースイエロー42等が挙げられる。
なお、顔料の平均粒子径は、動的光散乱(DLS)により測定された顔料粒子径から求めた値である。粒子径測定は、十分に希釈された感光性着色組成物(通常は希釈して、顔料濃度0.005~0.2質量%程度に調製。但し測定機器により推奨された濃度があれば、その濃度に従う。)に対して行い、25℃にて測定する。
また、第2の態様に係る感光性着色組成物は、赤色顔料、橙色顔料、青色顔料及び紫色顔料以外の顔料を含んでいてもよく、遮光性の観点からは黒色色材を含むことが好ましい。黒色色材としては、第1の態様において記載したものと同じものを好適に用いることができる。
本発明で用いる(b)アルカリ可溶性樹脂は、カルボキシル基又は水酸基を含む樹脂であり、特に、(b-I)エポキシ(メタ)アクリレート樹脂と、(b-II)側鎖にエチレン性不飽和結合を有する繰り返し単位α及び不飽和カルボン酸由来の繰り返し単位βを含有する(メタ)アクリル共重合樹脂とを含み、かつ、(b-II)(メタ)アクリル共重合樹脂における繰り返し単位αの含有割合が10モル%以上、好ましくは12モル%以上である。
また着色スペーサーにおいては、ブラックマトリクスと比べて高い膜厚で使用されることが多い。また、所望の段差を設けるためには感光性着色組成物が熱変形しにくい塗膜特性を有することが望ましいが、圧縮特性あるいは信頼性確保のためにブラックマトリクスと比べて顔料濃度を低く設定することが好ましい。その結果、着色スペーサーにおいては、膜表面近傍と膜底部近傍とで架橋密度の差がさらに大きくなり、しわが発生しやすくなる。またこのような熱変形のため十分な段差形成性が確保できない傾向がある。
(b-I)エポキシ(メタ)アクリレート樹脂は、エポキシ化合物とα,β-不飽和モノカルボン酸及び/又はエステル部分にカルボキシル基を有するα,β-不飽和モノカルボン酸エステルとの反応物及び該反応により生成した水酸基を更に多塩基酸及び/又はその無水物等の水酸基と反応し得る置換基を2個以上有する化合物とを反応させて得られる樹脂である。
エポキシ樹脂にα,β-不飽和モノカルボン酸又はカルボキシル基を有するα,β-不飽和モノカルボン酸エステルを付加させ、さらに、多塩基酸及び/又はその無水物を反応させることによって得られたアルカリ可溶性樹脂。
<エポキシ(メタ)アクリレート樹脂(b2)>
エポキシ樹脂にα,β-不飽和モノカルボン酸又はカルボキシル基を有するα,β-不飽和モノカルボン酸エステルを付加させ、さらに、多価アルコール、及び多塩基酸及び/又はその無水物と反応させることによって得られたアルカリ可溶性樹脂。
原料となるエポキシ樹脂の種類としては、クレゾールノボラック型エポキシ樹脂、フェノールノボラック型エポキシ樹脂、ビスフェノールA型エポキシ樹脂、ビスフェノールF型エポキシ樹脂、トリスフェノールメタン型エポキシ樹脂、ビフェニルノボラック型エポキシ樹脂、ナフタレンノボラック型エポキシ樹脂、ジシクロペンタジエンとフェノールまたはクレゾールとの重付加反応物とエピハロヒドリンとの反応生成物であるエポキシ樹脂、アダマンチル基含有エポキシ樹脂、フルオレン型エポキシ樹脂等を好適に用いることができ、このように主鎖に芳香族環を有するものを好適に用いることができる。
これらの内、感度の点から、特に好ましいものは(メタ)アクリル酸である。
α,β-不飽和モノカルボン酸又はカルボキシル基を有するα,β-不飽和モノカルボン酸エステルの使用量は、エポキシ樹脂のエポキシ基1当量に対し0.5~1.2当量の範囲が好ましく、さらに好ましくは0.7~1.1当量の範囲である。前記下限値以上とすることで不飽和基の導入量を十分とすることがで、引き続く多塩基酸及び/又はその無水物との反応も十分なものとすることができる傾向がある。また、前記上限値以下とすることでα,β-不飽和モノカルボン酸又はカルボキシル基を有するα,β-不飽和モノカルボン酸エステルが未反応物として残存することを抑制できる傾向がある。
カルボキシル基含有エポキシ(メタ)アクリレート樹脂は、通常、エポキシ樹脂とα,β-不飽和モノカルボン酸又はカルボキシル基を有するα,β-不飽和モノカルボン酸エステルとの反応物に、多塩基酸及び/又はその無水物を混合した後、もしくは、エポキシ樹脂とα,β-不飽和モノカルボン酸又はカルボキシル基を有するα,β-不飽和モノカルボン酸エステルとの反応物に、多塩基酸及び/又はその無水物及び多官能アルコールを混合した後に、加温することにより得られる。この場合、多塩基酸及び/又はその無水物と多官能アルコールの混合順序に、特に制限はない。加温により、エポキシ樹脂とα,β-不飽和モノカルボン酸又はカルボキシル基を有するα,β-不飽和モノカルボン酸エステルとの反応物と多官能アルコールとの混合物中に存在するいずれかの水酸基に対して多塩基酸及び/又はその無水物が付加反応する。
まず、前記一般式(b-I-I)で表される繰り返し単位構造を有するエポキシ(メタ)アクリレート樹脂について詳述する。
前記式(b-I-I)において、R12は置換基を有していてもよい2価の炭化水素基を表す。
2価の炭化水素基としては、2価の脂肪族基、2価の芳香族環基、1以上の2価の脂肪族基と1以上の2価の芳香族環基とを連結した基が挙げられる。
2価の分岐鎖状脂肪族基としては、前述の2価の直鎖状脂肪族基に、側鎖としてメチル基、エチル基、n-プロピル基、iso-プロピル基、n-ブチル基、iso-ブチル基、sec-ブチル基、tert-ブチル基等を有する構造が挙げられる。
2価の環状の脂肪族基が有する環の数は特に限定されないが、通常1以上であり、2以上が好ましく、また、通常12以下であり、10以下が好ましい。前記下限値以上とすることで強固な膜となり、基板密着性が良好となる傾向があり、また、前記上限値以下とすることで感度の悪化や現像時の膜減りを抑制しやすく、解像性が向上する傾向がある。2価の環状の脂肪族基の具体例としては、シクロヘキサン環、シクロヘプタン環、シクロデカン環、シクロドデカン環、ノルボルナン環、イソボルナン環、アダマンタン環、シクロドデカン環、ジシクロペンタジエン等の環から水素原子を2つ除した基が挙げられる。これらの中でも骨格の剛直性の観点から、ジシクロペンタジエン環、アダマンタン環から水素原子を2つ除した基が好ましい。
2価の脂肪族基の数は特に限定されないが、通常1以上であり、2以上が好ましく、通常10以下であり、5以下が好ましく、3以下がより好ましい。前記下限値以上とすることで強固な膜が得られやすく、表面荒れが生じにくく、基板への密着性が良好となる傾向があり、また、前記上限値以下とすることで感度の悪化や現像時の膜減りを抑制しやすく、解像性が向上する傾向がある。
2価の芳香族環基の数は特に限定されないが、通常1以上であり、2以上が好ましく、通常10以下であり、5以下が好ましく、3以下がより好ましい。前記下限値以上とすることで強固な膜が得られやすく、表面荒れが生じにくく、基板への密着性が良好となる傾向があり、また、前記上限値以下とすることで感度の悪化や現像時の膜減りを抑制しやすく、解像性が向上する傾向がある。
これらの中でもパターニング特性の観点から、無置換であることが好ましい。
これらの中でもパターニング特性の観点から、好ましくは、マレイン酸、コハク酸、イタコン酸、フタル酸、テトラヒドロフタル酸、ヘキサヒドロフタル酸、ピロメリット酸、トリメリット酸、ビフェニルテトラカルボン酸であり、より好ましくは、テトラヒドロフタル酸、ビフェニルテトラカルボン酸、テトラヒドロフタル酸、ビフェニルテトラカルボン酸である。
次に、前記一般式(b-I-II)で表される部分構造を有するエポキシ(メタ)アクリレート樹脂について詳述する。
前記一般式(b-I-II)において、R14は、環状炭化水素基を側鎖として有する2価の炭化水素基を表す。
環状炭化水素基としては、脂肪族環基又は芳香族環基が挙げられる。
また、脂肪族環基の炭素数は通常4以上であり、6以上が好ましく、8以上がより好ましく、また、40以下が好ましく、30以下がより好ましく、20以下がさらに好ましく、15以下が特に好ましい。前記下限値以上とすることで強固な膜が得られやすく、表面荒れが生じにくくなる傾向があり、また、前記上限値以下とすることで感度の悪化や現像時の膜減りを抑制しやすく、解像性が向上する傾向がある。
脂肪族環基における脂肪族環の具体例としてはシクロヘキサン環、シクロヘプタン環、シクロデカン環、シクロドデカン環、ノルボルナン環、イソボルナン環、アダマンタン環、シクロドデカン環等が挙げられる。これらの中でも感光性着色組成物の残膜率と解像性の観点から、アダマンタン環が好ましい。
芳香族環基としては、芳香族炭化水素環基、芳香族複素環基が挙げられる。また、芳香族環基の炭素数は通常4以上であり、6以上が好ましく、8以上がより好ましく、10以上がよりさらに好ましく、12以上が特に好ましく、また、40以下が好ましく、30以下がより好ましく、20以下がさらに好ましく、15以下が特に好ましい。前記下限値以上とすることで強固な膜が得られやすく、表面荒れが生じにくくなる傾向があり、また、前記上限値以下とすることでパターニング特性が良好となる傾向がある。
芳香族環基における芳香族環の具体例としては、ベンゼン環、ナフタレン環、アントラセン環、フェナントレン環、ペリレン環、テトラセン環、ピレン環、ベンズピレン環、クリセン環、トリフェニレン環、アセナフテン環、フルオランテン環、フルオレン環等が挙げられる。これらの中でもパターニング特性の観点から、フルオレン環が好ましい。
2価の分岐鎖状脂肪族基としては、前述の2価の直鎖状脂肪族基に、側鎖としてメチル基、エチル基、n-プロピル基、iso-プロピル基、n-ブチル基、iso-ブチル基、sec-ブチル基、tert-ブチル基等を有する構造が挙げられる。
2価の環状の脂肪族基が有する環の数は特に限定されないが、通常1以上であり、2以上が好ましく、また、通常10以下であり、5以下が好ましく、3以下がさらに好ましい。前記下限値以上とすることで強固な膜となり、基板密着性と良好となる傾向があり、また、前記上限値以下とすることで感度の悪化や現像時の膜減りを抑制しやすく、解像性が向上する傾向がある。2価の環状の脂肪族基の具体例としては、シクロヘキサン環、シクロヘプタン環、シクロデカン環、シクロドデカン環、ノルボルナン環、イソボルナン環、アダマンタン環、シクロドデカン環等の環から水素原子を2つ除した基が挙げられる。これらの中でも骨格の剛直性の観点から、アダマンタン環から水素原子を2つ除した基が好ましい。
2価の脂肪族基の数は特に限定されないが、通常1以上であり、2以上が好ましく、通常10以下であり、5以下が好ましく、3以下がより好ましい。前記下限値以上とすることで強固な膜が得られやすく、表面荒れが生じにくく、基板への密着性が良好となる傾向があり、また、前記上限値以下とすることで感度の悪化や現像時の膜減りを抑制しやすく、解像性が向上する傾向がある。
2価の芳香族環基の数は特に限定されないが、通常1以上であり、2以上が好ましく、通常10以下であり、5以下が好ましく、3以下がより好ましい。前記下限値以上とすることで強固な膜が得られやすく、表面荒れが生じにくく、基板への密着性が良好となる傾向があり、また、前記上限値以下とすることで感度の悪化や現像時の膜減りを抑制しやすく、解像性が向上する傾向がある。
前記一般式(b-I-II)において、R15及びR16は各々独立に、置換基を有していてもよい2価の脂肪族基を表す。
2価の分岐鎖状脂肪族基としては、前述の2価の直鎖状脂肪族基に、側鎖としてメチル基、エチル基、n-プロピル基、iso-プロピル基、n-ブチル基、iso-ブチル基、sec-ブチル基、tert-ブチル基等を有する構造が挙げられる。
2価の環状の脂肪族基が有する環の数は特に限定されないが、通常1以上であり、2以上が好ましく、また、通常12以下であり、10以下が好ましい。前記下限値以上とすることで強固な膜となり、基板密着性が良好となる傾向があり、また、前記上限値以下とすることで感度の悪化や現像時の膜減りを抑制しやすく、解像性が向上する傾向がある。2価の環状の脂肪族基の具体例としては、シクロヘキサン環、シクロヘプタン環、シクロデカン環、シクロドデカン環、ノルボルナン環、イソボルナン環、アダマンタン環、シクロドデカン環、ジシクロペンタジエン等の環から水素原子を2つ除した基が挙げられる。これらの中でも骨格の剛直性の観点から、ジシクロペンタジエン環、アダマンタン環から水素原子を2つ除した基が好ましい。
前記一般式(b-I-II)において、m及びnは0~2の整数を表す。前記下限値以上とすることでパターニング適正が良好となり、表面荒れが生じにくくなる傾向があり、また、前記上限値以下とすることで現像性が良好となる傾向がある。現像性の観点からm及びnが0であることが好ましく、一方で、パターニング適正、表面荒れの観点からm及びnが1以上であることが好ましい。
前記一般式(b-I-II-1)において、Rαは、置換基を有していてもよい1価の環状炭化水素基を表す。
環状炭化水素基としては、脂肪族環基又は芳香族環基が挙げられる。
また、脂肪族環基の炭素数は通常4以上であり、6以上が好ましく、8以上がより好ましく、また、40以下が好ましく、30以下がより好ましく、20以下がさらに好ましく、15以下が特に好ましい。前記下限値以上とすることで強固な膜が得られやすく、表面荒れが生じにくくなる傾向があり、また、前記上限値以下とすることでパターニング特性が良好となる傾向がある。
脂肪族環基における脂肪族環の具体例としてはシクロヘキサン環、シクロヘプタン環、シクロデカン環、シクロドデカン環、ノルボルナン環、イソボルナン環、アダマンタン環、シクロドデカン環等が挙げられる。これらの中でも強固な膜特性の観点から、アダマンタン環が好ましい。
芳香族環基としては、芳香族炭化水素環基、芳香族複素環基が挙げられる。また、芳香族環基の炭素数は通常4以上であり、5以上が好ましく、6以上がより好ましく、また、30以下が好ましく、20以下がより好ましく、15以下がさらに好ましい。前記下限値以上とすることで強固な膜が得られやすく、表面荒れが生じにくくなる傾向があり、また、前記上限値以下とすることでパターニング特性が良好となる傾向がある。
芳香族環基における芳香族環の具体例としては、ベンゼン環、ナフタレン環、アントラセン環、フェナントレン環、フルオレン環等が挙げられる。これらの中でも現像溶解性の観点から、フルオレン環が好ましい。
これらの中でもパターニング特性の観点から、無置換であることが好ましい。
前記式(b-I-II-2)において、Rβは、置換基を有していてもよい2価の環状炭化水素基を表す。
環状炭化水素基としては、脂肪族環基又は芳香族環基が挙げられる。
また、脂肪族環基の炭素数は通常4以上であり、6以上が好ましく、8以上がより好ましく、また、40以下が好ましく、35以下がより好ましく、30以下がさらに好ましい。前記下限値以上とすることで現像時の膜あれを抑制する傾向があり、また、前記上限値以下とすることで感度の悪化や現像時の膜減りを抑制しやすく、解像性が向上する傾向がある。
脂肪族環基における脂肪族環の具体例としては、シクロヘキサン環、シクロヘプタン環、シクロデカン環、シクロドデカン環、ノルボルナン環、イソボルナン環、アダマンタン環、シクロドデカン環等が挙げられる。これらの中でも保存安定性の観点から、アダマンタン環が好ましい。
芳香族環基としては、芳香族炭化水素環基、芳香族複素環基が挙げられる。また、芳香族環基の炭素数は通常4以上であり、6以上が好ましく、8以上がより好ましく、10以上がさらに好ましく、また、40以下が好ましく、30以下がより好ましく、20以下がさらに好ましく、15以下が特に好ましい。前記下限値以上とすることで強固な膜が得られやすく、表面荒れが生じにくくなる傾向があり、また、前記上限値以下とすることで感度の悪化や膜減りを抑制しやすく、解像性が向上する傾向がある。
芳香族環基における芳香族環の具体例としては、ベンゼン環、ナフタレン環、アントラセン環、フェナントレン環、フルオレン環等が挙げられる。これらの中でも現像性の観点から、フルオレン環が好ましい。
一方で、塗膜の低吸湿性及びパターニング特性の観点から、Rβが2価の芳香族環基であることが好ましく、2価のフルオレン環基であることがより好ましい。
また、置換基を介して2つのベンゼン環が連結していてもよい。この場合の置換基としては、-O-、-S-、-NH-、-CH2-等の2価の基が挙げられる。
これらの中でもパターニング特性の観点から、無置換であることが好ましい。また、膜減り等を生じにくくする観点から、メチル基置換であることが好ましい。
多塩基酸としては、マレイン酸、コハク酸、イタコン酸、フタル酸、テトラヒドロフタル酸、ヘキサヒドロフタル酸、ピロメリット酸、トリメリット酸、ベンゾフェノンテトラカルボン酸、メチルヘキサヒドロフタル酸、エンドメチレンテトラヒドロフタル酸、クロレンド酸、メチルテトラヒドロフタル酸、ビフェニルテトラカルボン酸から選ばれた1種又は2種以上が挙げられる。
これらの中でもパターニング特性の観点から、好ましくは、マレイン酸、コハク酸、イタコン酸、フタル酸、テトラヒドロフタル酸、ヘキサヒドロフタル酸、ピロメリット酸、トリメリット酸、ビフェニルテトラカルボン酸であり、より好ましくは、テトラヒドロフタル酸、ビフェニルテトラカルボン酸、テトラヒドロフタル酸、ビフェニルテトラカルボン酸である。
(b-II)(メタ)アクリル共重合樹脂は、側鎖にエチレン性不飽和結合を有する繰り返し単位α及び不飽和カルボン酸由来の繰り返し単位βを含有する。繰り返し単位αを有することで信頼性を確保でき、また、繰り返し単位βを有することで表面平滑性が良化すると考えられる。
2価の連結基としては、置換基を有していてもよいアルキレン基又は置換基を有していてもよい2価の芳香族環基が挙げられる。
また、芳香族複素環基における芳香族複素環基としては、単環であっても縮合環であってもよく、例えば、フラン環、ベンゾフラン環、チオフェン環、ベンゾチオフェン環、ピロール環、ピラゾール環、イミダゾール環、オキサジアゾール環、インドール環、カルバゾール環、ピロロイミダゾール環、ピロロピラゾール環、ピロロピロール環、チエノピロール環、チエノチオフェン環、フロピロール環、フロフラン環、チエノフラン環、ベンゾイソオキサゾール環、ベンゾイソチアゾール環、ベンゾイミダゾール環、ピリジン環、ピラジン環、ピリダジン環、ピリミジン環、トリアジン環、キノリン環、イソキノリン環、シノリン環、キノキサリン環、フェナントリジン環、ベンゾイミダゾール環、ペリミジン環、キナゾリン環、キナゾリノン環、アズレン環などの基が挙げられる。
また、前記一般式(I)で表される化学構造としては、反応性の観点から、下記一般式(I-1)又は(I-2)で表される化学構造が好ましく、下記一般式(I-1)で表される化学構造がより好ましい。
これらの中でも、溶解性の観点から、R1d~R4dは水素原子であることが好ましい。
これらの中でも、現像溶解性の観点から、R5d及びR6dが水素原子であるか、R5d及びR6dが連結して炭素数5~6の脂肪族環を形成していることが好ましい。
本発明で用いる(b)アルカリ可溶性樹脂は、前記(b-I)エポキシ(メタ)アクリレート樹脂及び前記(b-II)(メタ)アクリル共重合樹脂以外に、その他のアルカリ可溶性樹脂を含んでいてもよい。
(c)光重合開始剤は、光を直接吸収し、分解反応又は水素引き抜き反応を起こし、重合活性ラジカルを発生する機能を有する成分である。必要に応じて重合促進剤(連鎖移動剤)、増感色素等の付加剤を添加して使用してもよい。
光重合開始剤としては、例えば、日本国特開昭59-152396号公報、日本国特開昭61-151197号公報に記載のチタノセン化合物を含むメタロセン化合物;日本国特開2000-56118号公報に記載のヘキサアリールビイミダゾール誘導体;日本国特開平10-39503号公報に記載のハロメチル化オキサジアゾール誘導体、ハロメチル-s-トリアジン誘導体、N-フェニルグリシン等のN-アリール-α-アミノ酸類、N-アリール-α-アミノ酸塩類、N-アリール-α-アミノ酸エステル類等のラジカル活性剤、α-アミノアルキルフェノン誘導体;日本国特開2000-80068号公報、日本国特開2006-36750号公報等に記載されているオキシムエステル誘導体等が挙げられる。
R21bは芳香環又はヘテロ芳香環を含む任意の置換基を示す。
R22aは、置換基を有していてもよいアルカノイル基、又は、置換基を有していてもよいアリーロイル基を示す。
アルキル基が有していてもよい置換基としては、芳香族環基、水酸基、カルボキシル基、ハロゲン原子、アミノ基、アミド基、4-(2-メトキシ-1-メチル)エトキシ-2-メチルフェニル基又はN-アセチル-N-アセトキシアミノ基などが挙げられ、合成容易性の観点からは、無置換であることが好ましい。
芳香族環基が有していてもよい置換基としては、水酸基、カルボキシル基、ハロゲン原子、アミノ基、アミド基、アルキル基などが挙げられ、現像性の観点から水酸基、カルボキシル基が好ましく、カルボキシル基がより好ましい。
これらの中でも、現像性の観点から、R21aが置換基を有していてもよいアルキル基であることが好ましく、無置換のアルキル基であることがより好ましく、メチル基であることがさらに好ましい。
アルカノイル基が有していてもよい置換基としては、芳香族環基、水酸基、カルボキシル基、ハロゲン原子、アミノ基、アミド基などが挙げられ、合成容易性の観点からは、無置換であることが好ましい。
アリーロイル基が有していてもよい置換基としては、水酸基、カルボキシル基、ハロゲン原子、アミノ基、アミド基、アルキル基などが挙げられ、合成容易性の観点からは、無置換であることが好ましい。
これらの中でも、感度の観点から、R22aが置換基を有していてもよいアルカノイル基であることが好ましく、無置換のアルカノイル基であることがより好ましく、アセチル基であることがさらに好ましい。
R24は、置換基を有していてもよいアルキル基、又は置換基を有していてもよい芳香族環基を表す。
R25は、水酸基、カルボキシル基又は下記一般式(V-1)で表される基を表し、hは0~5の整数を表す。
式(V)中に示されるベンゼン環はさらに置換基を有していてもよい。
R25bは、置換基を有していてもよいアルキレン基を表す。
R25bのアルキレン部分は、-O-、-S-、-COO-又は-OCO-により1~5回中断されていてもよい。R25のアルキレン部分は分岐側鎖があってもよく、シクロヘキシレンであってもよい。
R25cは、水酸基又はカルボキシル基を表す。
アルキル基が有していてもよい置換基としては、芳香族環基、水酸基、カルボキシル基、ハロゲン原子、アミノ基、アミド基などが挙げられ、アルカリ現像性の観点から水酸基、カルボキシル基が好ましく、カルボキシル基がより好ましい。また、合成容易性の観点からは、無置換であることが好ましい。
芳香族環基が有していてもよい置換基としては、水酸基、カルボキシル基、ハロゲン原子、アミノ基、アミド基、アルキル基などが挙げられ、現像性の観点から水酸基、カルボキシル基が好ましく、カルボキシル基がより好ましい。
これらの中でも、現像性の観点から、R23が置換基を有していてもよいアルキル基であることが好ましく、無置換のアルキル基であることがより好ましく、メチル基であることがさらに好ましい。
アルキル基が有していてもよい置換基としては、ハロゲン原子、水酸基、カルボキシル基、アミノ基、アミド基などが挙げられ、アルカリ現像性の観点から水酸基、カルボキシル基が好ましく、カルボキシル基がより好ましく、他方合成容易性の観点からは無置換であることが好ましい。
また、芳香族複素環基は、1個の遊離原子価を有する芳香族複素環を意味する。芳香族複素環基の芳香族複素環は、単環であっても縮合環であってもよく、例えば、フラン環、ベンゾフラン環、チオフェン環、ベンゾチオフェン環、ピロール環、ピラゾール環、イミダゾール環、オキサジアゾール環、インドール環、カルバゾール環、ピロロイミダゾール環、ピロロピラゾール環、ピロロピロール環、チエノピロール環、チエノチオフェン環、フロピロール環、フロフラン環、チエノフラン環、ベンゾイソオキサゾール環、ベンゾイソチアゾール環、ベンゾイミダゾール環、ピリジン環、ピラジン環、ピリダジン環、ピリミジン環、トリアジン環、キノリン環、イソキノリン環、シノリン環、キノキサリン環、フェナントリジン環、ベンゾイミダゾール環、ペリミジン環、キナゾリン環、キナゾリノン環、アズレン環などが挙げられる。
芳香族環基が有していてもよい置換基としては、アルキル基、ハロゲン原子、水酸基、カルボキシル基などが挙げられる。
これらの中でも、感度の観点から、R24が置換基を有していてもよいアルキル基であることが好ましく、無置換のアルキル基であることがより好ましく、メチル基であることがさらに好ましい。
他方、製版性の観点から、R24が置換基を有していてもよい芳香族環基であることが好ましく、置換基を有していてもよい芳香族炭化水素基であることがより好ましく、無置換の芳香族炭化水素基であることがさらに好ましく、フェニル基であることが特に好ましい。
前記一般式(V-1)において、前述のとおり、R25aは、-O-、-S-、-OCO-又は-COO-を表すが、これらの中でも、感度及び現像性の観点から、-O-又は-OCO-が好ましく、-O-がより好ましい。
R25bにおけるアルキレン基の炭素数は特に限定されないが、感光性着色組成物への溶解性の観点から1以上であることが好ましく、2以上であることがより好ましく、また、20以下であることが好ましく、10以下であることがより好ましく、5以下であることがさらに好ましく、3以下であることが特に好ましい。
アルキレン基は、直鎖でもよく、分岐していてもよく、脂肪族環を含むものであってもよい。これらの中でも、感光性着色組成物への溶解性の観点から、直鎖であることが好ましい。
他方、合成容易性の観点からは、hは0であることが好ましい。
光重合開始剤には、必要に応じて、感応感度を高める目的で、画像露光光源の波長に応じた増感色素、重合促進剤を配合させることができる。増感色素としては、日本国特開平4-221958号公報、日本国特開平4-219756号公報に記載のキサンテン色素、日本国特開平3-239703号公報、日本国特開平5-289335号公報に記載の複素環を有するクマリン色素、日本国特開平3-239703号公報、日本国特開平5-289335号公報に記載の3-ケトクマリン化合物、日本国特開平6-19240号公報に記載のピロメテン色素、その他、日本国特開昭47-2528号公報、日本国特開昭54-155292号公報、日本国特公昭45-37377号公報、日本国特開昭48-84183号公報、日本国特開昭52-112681号公報、日本国特開昭58-15503号公報、日本国特開昭60-88005号公報、日本国特開昭59-56403号公報、日本国特開平2-69号公報、日本国特開昭57-168088号公報、日本国特開平5-107761号公報、日本国特開平5-210240号公報、日本国特開平4-288818号公報に記載のジアルキルアミノベンゼン骨格を有する色素等を挙げることができる。
増感色素もまた1種を単独で用いてもよく、2種以上を併用してもよい。
本発明の感光性着色組成物は、(d)エチレン性不飽和化合物を含む。(d)エチレン性不飽和化合物を含むことで、感度が向上する。
本発明に用いられるエチレン性不飽和化合物は、分子内にエチレン性不飽和基を少なくとも1個有する化合物である。具体的には、例えば(メタ)アクリル酸、(メタ)アクリル酸アルキルエステル、アクリロニトリル、スチレン、及びエチレン性不飽和結合を1個有するカルボン酸と、多価又は1価アルコールのモノエステル等が挙げられる。
多官能エチレン性単量体の例としては、例えば脂肪族ポリヒドロキシ化合物と不飽和カルボン酸とのエステル;芳香族ポリヒドロキシ化合物と不飽和カルボン酸とのエステル;脂肪族ポリヒドロキシ化合物、芳香族ポリヒドロキシ化合物等の多価ヒドロキシ化合物と、不飽和カルボン酸及び多塩基性カルボン酸とのエステル化反応により得られるエステルなどが挙げられる。
これらは1種を単独で用いてもよく、2種以上を併用してもよい。
本発明の感光性着色組成物は、(e)溶剤を含む。(e)溶剤を含むことで、顔料を溶剤中に分散でき、また、塗布が容易となる。
本発明の感光性着色組成物は、通常、(a)着色剤、(b)アルカリ可溶性樹脂、(c)光重合開始剤、(d)エチレン性不飽和化合物、(f)分散剤、及び必要に応じて使用されるその他の各種材料が、溶剤に溶解又は分散した状態で使用される。溶剤の中でも、分散性や塗布性の観点から有機溶剤が好ましい。
エチレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、エチレングリコールモノエチルエーテル、エチレングリコールモノプロピルエーテル、エチレングリコールモノブチルエーテル、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、プロピレングリコールモノエチルエーテル、プロピレングリコールモノ-n-ブチルエーテル、プロピレングリコール-t-ブチルエーテル、ジエチレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、ジエチレングリコールモノエチルエーテル、ジエチレングリコールモノ-n-ブチルエーテル、メトキシメチルペンタノール、ジプロピレングリコールモノエチルエーテル、ジプロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、3-メチル-3-メトキシブタノール、トリエチレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、トリエチレングリコールモノエチルエーテル、トリプロピレングリコールメチルエーテルのようなグリコールモノアルキルエーテル類;
エチレングリコールジメチルエーテル、エチレングリコールジエチルエーテル、ジエチレングリコールジメチルエーテル、ジエチレングリコールジエチルエーテル、ジエチレングリコールジプロピルエーテル、ジエチレングリコールジブチルエーテル、ジプロピレングリコールジメチルエーテルのようなグリコールジアルキルエーテル類;
エチレングリコールジアセテート、1,3-ブチレングリコールジアセテート、1,6-ヘキサノールジアセテートなどのグリコールジアセテート類;
シクロヘキサノールアセテートなどのアルキルアセテート類;
アミルエーテル、ジエチルエーテル、ジプロピルエーテル、ジイソプロピルエーテル、ジブチルエーテル、ジアミルエーテル、エチルイソブチルエーテル、ジヘキシルエーテルのようなエーテル類;
エタノール、プロパノール、ブタノール、ヘキサノール、シクロヘキサノール、エチレングリコール、プロピレングリコール、ブタンジオール、ジエチレングリコール、ジプロピレングリコール、トリエチレングリコール、メトキシメチルペンタノール、グリセリン、ベンジルアルコールのような1価又は多価アルコール類;
n-ペンタン、n-オクタン、ジイソブチレン、n-ヘキサン、ヘキセン、イソプレン、ジペンテン、ドデカンのような脂肪族炭化水素類;
シクロヘキサン、メチルシクロヘキサン、メチルシクロヘキセン、ビシクロヘキシルのような脂環式炭化水素類;
アミルホルメート、エチルホルメート、酢酸エチル、酢酸ブチル、酢酸プロピル、酢酸アミル、メチルイソブチレート、エチレングリコールアセテート、エチルプロピオネート、プロピルプロピオネート、酪酸ブチル、酪酸イソブチル、イソ酪酸メチル、エチルカプリレート、ブチルステアレート、エチルベンゾエート、3-エトキシプロピオン酸メチル、3-エトキシプロピオン酸エチル、3-メトキシプロピオン酸メチル、3-メトキシプロピオン酸エチル、3-メトキシプロピオン酸プロピル、3-メトキシプロピオン酸ブチル、γ-ブチロラクトンのような鎖状又は環状エステル類;
3-メトキシプロピオン酸、3-エトキシプロピオン酸のようなアルコキシカルボン酸類;
ブチルクロリド、アミルクロリドのようなハロゲン化炭化水素類;
メトキシメチルペンタノンのようなエーテルケトン類;
アセトニトリル、ベンゾニトリルのようなニトリル類等。
これらの有機溶剤は、単独で用いてもよく、2種以上を併用してもよい。
また、グリコールアルキルエーテルアセテート類は、単独で使用してもよいが、他の有機溶剤を併用してもよい。併用する有機溶剤として、特に好ましいのはグリコールモノアルキルエーテル類である。中でも、特に組成物中の構成成分の溶解性からプロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルが好ましい。なお、グリコールモノアルキルエーテル類は極性が高く、添加量が多すぎると顔料が凝集しやすく、後に得られる着色樹脂組成物の粘度が上がっていくなどの保存安定性が低下する傾向があるので、溶剤中のグリコールモノアルキルエーテル類の割合は5質量%~30質量%が好ましく、5質量%~20質量%がより好ましい。
好ましい高沸点溶剤として、例えば前述の各種溶剤の中ではジエチレングリコールモノ-n-ブチルエーテルアセテート、ジエチレングリコールモノエチルエーテルアセテート、ジプロピレングリコールメチルエーテルアセテート、1,3-ブチレングリコールジアセテート、1,6-ヘキサノールジアセテート、トリアセチンなどが挙げられる。
本発明の感光性着色組成物においては、(a)着色剤を微細に分散させ、且つその分散状態を安定化させることが品質の安定性確保には重要なため、(f)分散剤を含む。
(f)分散剤としては、官能基を有する高分子分散剤が好ましく、更に、分散安定性の面からカルボキシル基;リン酸基;スルホン酸基;又はこれらの塩基;一級、二級又は三級アミノ基;四級アンモニウム塩基;ピリジン、ピリミジン、ピラジン等の含窒素ヘテロ環由来の基、等の官能基を有する高分子分散剤が好ましい。中でも特に、一級、二級又は三級アミノ基;四級アンモニウム塩基;ピリジン、ピリミジン、ピラジン等の含窒素ヘテロ環由来の基、等の塩基性官能基を有する高分子分散剤が顔料を分散する際に少量の分散剤で分散することができるとの観点から特に好ましい。
これらの高分子分散剤は1種を単独で使用してもよく、又は2種以上を併用してもよい。
これらの内、顔料の分散性の観点から、(f)分散剤は官能基を有するウレタン系高分子分散剤及び/又はアクリル系高分子分散剤を含むことが好ましく、アクリル系高分子分散剤を含むことが特に好ましい。
また分散性、保存性の面から、塩基性官能基を有し、ポリエステル結合及び/又はポリエーテル結合を有する高分子分散剤が好ましい。
ウレタン系高分子分散剤として好ましい化学構造を具体的に例示するならば、例えば、ポリイソシアネート化合物と、分子内に水酸基を1個又は2個有する数平均分子量300~10,000の化合物と、同一分子内に活性水素と3級アミノ基を有する化合物とを反応させることによって得られる、重量平均分子量1,000~200,000の分散樹脂等が挙げられる。これらをベンジルクロリド等の四級化剤で処理することで、3級アミノ基の全部又は一部を4級アンモニウム塩基にすることができる。
ポリエーテルグリコールとしては、ポリエーテルジオール、ポリエーテルエステルジオール、及びこれら2種類以上の混合物が挙げられる。ポリエーテルジオールとしては、アルキレンオキシドを単独又は共重合させて得られるもの、例えば、ポリエチレングリコール、ポリプロピレングリコール、ポリエチレン-プロピレングリコール、ポリオキシテトラメチレングリコール、ポリオキシヘキサメチレングリコール、ポリオキシオクタメチレングリコール及びそれらの2種以上の混合物が挙げられる。
これらは1種を単独で用いてもよく、2種以上を併用してもよい。
活性水素、即ち、酸素原子、窒素原子又は硫黄原子に直接結合している水素原子としては、水酸基、アミノ基、チオール基等の官能基中の水素原子が挙げられ、中でもアミノ基、特に1級のアミノ基の水素原子が好ましい。
このような同一分子内に活性水素と3級アミノ基を有する化合物を例示するならば、N,N-ジメチル-1,3-プロパンジアミン、N,N-ジエチル-1,3-プロパンジアミン、N,N-ジプロピル-1,3-プロパンジアミン、N,N-ジブチル-1,3-プロパンジアミン、N,N-ジメチルエチレンジアミン、N,N-ジエチルエチレンジアミン、N,N-ジプロピルエチレンジアミン、N,N-ジブチルエチレンジアミン、N,N-ジメチル-1,4-ブタンジアミン、N,N-ジエチル-1,4-ブタンジアミン、N,N-ジプロピル-1,4-ブタンジアミン、N,N-ジブチル-1,4-ブタンジアミン等が挙げられる。
これらは1種を単独で用いてもよく、2種以上を併用してもよい。
ウレタン系高分子分散剤の重量平均分子量(Mw)は通常1,000~200,000、好ましくは2,000~100,000、より好ましくは3,000~50,000の範囲である。この分子量が1,000未満では分散性及び分散安定性が劣る傾向があり、200,000を超えると溶解性が低下し分散性が劣ると同時に反応の制御が困難となる傾向がある。
該A-B又はB-A-Bブロック共重合体は、例えば、以下に示すリビング重合法にて調製される。
リビング重合法には、アニオンリビング重合法、カチオンリビング重合法、ラジカルリビング重合法があり、このうち、アニオンリビング重合法は、重合活性種がアニオンであり、例えば下記スキームで表される。
また、本発明で用いることができるA-Bブロック共重合体、B-A-Bブロック共重合体1g中の4級アンモニウム塩基の量は、通常0.1~10mmolであることが好ましく、この範囲内にすることで良好な分散性を確保できる傾向がある。
ここで、これらのブロック共重合体等の分散剤のアミン価は、分散剤試料中の溶剤を除いた固形分1gあたりの塩基量と当量のKOHの質量で表し、次の方法により測定する。
100mLのビーカーに分散剤試料の0.5~1.5gを精秤し、50mLの酢酸で溶解する。pH電極を備えた自動滴定装置を使って、この溶液を0.1mol/LのHClO4酢酸溶液にて中和滴定する。滴定pH曲線の変曲点を滴定終点とし次式によりアミン価を求める。
〔但し、W:分散剤試料秤取量[g]、V:滴定終点での滴定量[mL]、S:分散剤試料の固形分濃度[質量%]を表す。〕
また、このブロック共重合体のアミン価は、該酸価の元となる酸性基の有無及び種類にもよるが、一般に低い方が好ましく、通常10mgKOH/g以下であり、その重量平均分子量(Mw)は、1000~100,000の範囲が好ましい。前記範囲内とすることで良好な分散性を確保できる傾向がある。
同様に、上記式(ii)のR35及びR36における、置換基を有していてもよいアリール基としては、上記式(i)のR31~R33として例示したものを好ましく採用することができる。また、上記式(ii)のR35及びR36における、置換基を有していてもよいアラルキル基としては、上記式(i)のR31~R33として例示したものを好ましく採用することができる。
また、上記式(i)において、対アニオンのY-としては、Cl-、Br-、I-、ClO4 -、BF4 -、CH3COO-、PF6 -等が挙げられる。
R38における、アルキル基が有していてもよい置換基としては、ハロゲン原子、アルコキシ基等が挙げられる。また、アリール基又はアラルキル基が有していてもよい置換基としては、鎖状のアルキル基、ハロゲン原子、アルコキシ基等が挙げられる。また、R38で示される鎖状のアルキル基には、直鎖状及び分岐鎖状のいずれも含まれる。
本発明の感光性着色組成物には、上述の成分の他、シランカップリング剤等の密着向上剤、塗布性向上剤、現像改良剤、紫外線吸収剤、酸化防止剤、界面活性剤、顔料誘導体、光酸発生剤、架橋剤、重合促進剤等を適宜配合することができる。
本発明の感光性着色組成物には、基板との密着性を改善するため、密着向上剤を含有させてもよい。密着向上剤としては、シランカップリング剤、燐酸基含有化合物等が好ましい。
シランカップリング剤の種類としては、エポキシ系、(メタ)アクリル系、アミノ系等種々のものを1種を単独で、或いは2種以上を混合して使用できる。
燐酸基含有化合物としては、(メタ)アクリロイル基含有ホスフェート類が好ましく、下記一般式(g1)、(g2)又は(g3)で表されるものが好ましい。
これらの燐酸基含有化合物も1種類を単独で用いても、2種以上を組み合わせて使用してもよい。
本発明の感光性着色組成物には、塗布性向上ため、界面活性剤を含有させてもよい。
このような界面活性剤としては、例えば、TSF4460(ジーイー東芝シリコーン社製)、DFX-18(ネオス社製)、BYK-300、BYK-325、BYK-330(ビックケミー社製)、KP340(信越シリコーン社製)、F-470、F-475、F-478、F-559(DIC社製)、SH7PA(トーレシリコーン社製)、DS-401(ダイキン社製)、L-77(日本ユニカー社製)、FC4430(住友3M社製)等が挙げられる。
なお、界面活性剤は、1種を用いてもよく、2種以上を任意の組み合わせ及び比率で併用してもよい。
本発明の感光性着色組成物には、分散性、保存性向上のため、分散助剤として顔料誘導体を含有させてもよい。
顔料誘導体としてはアゾ系、フタロシアニン系、キナクリドン系、ベンズイミダゾロン系、キノフタロン系、イソインドリノン系、ジオキサジン系、アントラキノン系、インダンスレン系、ペリレン系、ペリノン系、ジケトピロロピロール系、ジオキサジン系等の誘導体が挙げられるが、中でもフタロシアニン系、キノフタロン系が好ましい。
顔料誘導体の置換基としてはスルホン酸基、スルホンアミド基及びその4級塩、フタルイミドメチル基、ジアルキルアミノアルキル基、水酸基、カルボキシル基、アミド基等が顔料骨格に直接又はアルキル基、アリール基、複素環基等を介して結合したものが挙げられ、好ましくはスルホン酸基である。またこれら置換基は一つの顔料骨格に複数置換していてもよい。
光酸発生剤とは、紫外線により酸を発生することができる化合物であり、露光を行った際に発生する酸の作用により、例えばメラミン化合物等架橋剤があることで架橋反応を進行させることとなる。係る光酸発生剤の中でも、溶剤に対する溶解性、特に感光性着色組成物に使われる溶剤に対する溶解性が大きいものが好ましいものであり、例えば、ジフェニルヨードニウム、ジトリルヨードニウム、フェニル(p-アニシル)ヨードニウム、ビス(m-ニトロフェニル)ヨードニウム、ビス(p-tert-ブチルフェニル)ヨードニウム、ビス(p-クロロフェニル)ヨードニウム、ビス(n-ドデシル)ヨードニウム、p-イソブチルフェニル(p-トリル)ヨードニウム、p-イソプロピルフェニル(p-トリル)ヨードニウムなどのジアリールヨードニウム、あるいはトリフェニルスルホニウムなどのトリアリールスルホニウムのクロリド、ブロミド、あるいはホウフッ化塩、ヘキサフルオロフォスフェート塩、ヘキサフルオロアルセネート塩、芳香族スルホン酸塩、テトラキス(ペンタフルオロフェニル)ボレート塩等や、ジフェニルフェナシルスルホニウム(n-ブチル)トリフェニルボレート等のスルホニウム有機ホウ素錯体類、あるいは、2-メチル-4,6-ビストリクロロメチルトリアジン、2-(4-メトキシフェニル)-4,6-ビストリクロロメチルトリアジンなどのトリアジン化合物等を挙げることができるがこの限りではない。
本発明の感光性着色組成物には、さらに架橋剤を加えることができ、例えばメラミン又はグアナミン系の化合物を用いることができる。これら架橋剤としては、例えば、下記一般式(6)で示されるメラミン又はグアナミン系の化合物を挙げることができる。
ここで、炭素数6~12のアリール基は典型的にはフェニル基、1-ナフチル基又は2-ナフチル基であり、これらのフェニル基やナフチル基には、アルキル基、アルコキシ基、ハロゲン原子などの置換基が結合していてもよい。アルキル基及びアルコキシ基は、それぞれ炭素数1~6程度であることができる。R68で表されるアルキル基は、上記のなかでも、メチル基又はエチル基、とりわけメチル基であるのが好ましい。
2,6-ビス(ヒドロキシメチル)-4-メチルフェノール、4-tert-ブチル-2,6-ビス(ヒドロキシメチル)フェノール、5-エチル-1,3-ビス(ヒドロキシメチル)ペルヒドロ-1,3,5-トリアジン-2-オン(通称N-エチルジメチロールトリアゾン)又はそのジメチルエーテル体、ジメチロールトリメチレン尿素又はそのジメチルエーテル体、3,5-ビス(ヒドロキシメチル)ペルヒドロ-1,3,5-オキサジアジン-4-オン(通称ジメチロールウロン)又はそのジメチルエーテル体、テトラメチロールグリオキザールジウレイン又はそのテトラメチルエーテル体。
重合促進剤として、また、基板への密着性の向上のため、メルカプト化合物を添加することも可能である。
本発明の感光性着色組成物において、(a)着色剤の含有割合は、感光性着色組成物中の全固形分量に対して通常10質量%以上であり、20質量%以上であることがより好ましく、30質量%以上であることがさらに好ましく、35質量%以上であることがよりさらに好ましく、40質量%以上であることが特に好ましく、また、通常60質量%以下であることが好ましく、50質量%以下であることがより好ましく、48質量%以下であることがさらに好ましく、46質量%以下であることが特に好ましい。(a)着色剤の含有割合を前記下限値以上とすることで、十分な光学濃度(OD)が得られる傾向があり、また、前記上限値以下とすることで十分な製版特性が得られやすい傾向がある。
また、本発明の感光性着色組成物中に占める増感色素の配合割合は感度の観点から感光性着色組成物中の全固形分中、通常20質量%以下、好ましくは15質量%以下、更に好ましくは10質量%以下である。
本発明の感光性着色組成物は、着色スペーサー形成用に好適に使用することができ、着色スペーサーとして用いるとの観点からは黒色を呈していることが好ましい。また、感光性着色組成物を硬化した塗膜の膜厚1μm当たりの光学濃度(OD)が1.0以上であることが好ましく、1.2以上であることがより好ましく、1.5以上であることがさらに好ましく、1.8以上であることが特に好ましく、通常4.0以下であり、3.0以下であることが好ましく、2.5以下であることがより好ましい。
本発明の感光性着色組成物(以下、「レジスト」と称することがある。)は、常法に従って製造される。
通常、(a)着色剤は、予めペイントコンディショナー、サンドグラインダー、ボールミル、ロールミル、ストーンミル、ジェットミル、ホモジナイザー等を用いて分散処理するのが好ましい。分散処理により(a)着色剤が微粒子化されるため、レジストの塗布特性が向上する。
このように、レジストを製造する工程において、(a)着色剤、(e)溶剤、及び(f)分散剤を少なくとも含有する顔料分散液を製造することが好ましい。顔料分散液に用いることができる(a)着色剤、(e)有機溶剤、及び(f)分散剤としては、それぞれ感光性着色組成物に用いることができるものとして記載したものを好ましく採用することができる。
サンドグラインダーで(a)着色剤を分散させる場合には、0.1~8mm程度の粒子径のガラスビーズ又はジルコニアビーズが好ましく用いられる。分散処理条件は、温度は通常0℃から100℃であり、好ましくは室温から80℃の範囲である。分散時間は液の組成及び分散処理装置のサイズ等により適正時間が異なるため適宜調節する。レジストの20度鏡面光沢度(JIS Z8741)が50~300の範囲となるように、インクの光沢を制御するのが分散の目安である。レジストの光沢度が低い場合には、分散処理が十分でなく荒い顔料(色材)粒子が残っていることが多く、現像性、密着性、解像性等が不十分となる可能性がある。また、光沢値が上記範囲を超えるまで分散処理を行うと、顔料が破砕して超微粒子が多数生じるため、却って分散安定性が損なわれる傾向がある。
次に、上記分散処理により得られたインクと、レジスト中に含まれる、上記の他の成分を混合し、均一な溶液とする。レジストの製造工程においては、微細なゴミが液中に混じることが多いため、得られたレジストはフィルター等により濾過処理するのが望ましい。
本発明の感光性着色組成物を硬化させることで、硬化物を得ることができる。感光性着色組成物を硬化してなる硬化物は、着色スペーサーとして好適に用いることができる。
次に、本発明の感光性着色組成物を用いた着色スペーサーについて、その製造方法に従って説明する。
着色スペーサーを形成するための支持体としては、適度の強度があれば、その材質は特に限定されるものではない。主に透明基板が使用されるが、材質としては、例えば、ポリエチレンテレフタレートなどのポリエステル系樹脂、ポリプロピレン、ポリエチレンなどのポリオレフィン系樹脂、ポリカーボネート、ポリメチルメタクリレート、ポリスルフォンなどの熱可塑性樹脂製シート、エポキシ樹脂、不飽和ポリエステル樹脂、ポリ(メタ)アクリル系樹脂などの熱硬化性樹脂シート、又は各種ガラスなどが挙げられる。この中でも、耐熱性の観点からガラス、耐熱性樹脂が好ましい。また、基板の表面にITO、IZO等の透明電極が成膜されている場合もある。透明基板以外では、TFTアレイ上に形成することも可能である。
透明基板の厚さは、通常0.05~10mm、好ましくは0.1~7mmの範囲とされる。また各種樹脂の薄膜形成処理を行う場合、その膜厚は、通常0.01~10μm、好ましくは0.05~5μmの範囲である。
本発明の感光性着色組成物は、公知のカラーフィルター用感光性着色組成物と同様の用途に使用されるが、以下、着色スペーサー(ブラックフォトスペーサー)として使用される場合について、本発明の感光性着色組成物を用いたブラックフォトスペーサーの形成方法の具体例に従って説明する。
[1]基板への供給方法
本発明の感光性着色組成物は、通常、溶剤に溶解或いは分散された状態で、基板上へ供給される。その供給方法としては、従来公知の方法、例えば、スピナー法、ワイヤーバー法、フローコート法、ダイコート法、ロールコート法、スプレーコート法などによって行うことができる。また、インクジェット法や印刷法などにより、パターン状に供給されてもよい。中でも、ダイコート法によれば、塗布液の使用量が大幅に削減され、かつ、スピンコート法によった際に付着するミストなどの影響が全くない、異物発生が抑制されるなど、総合的な観点から好ましい。
基板上に感光性着色組成物溶液を供給した後の乾燥は、ホットプレート、IRオーブン、コンベクションオーブンを使用した乾燥方法によるのが好ましい。また、温度を高めず、減圧チャンバー内で乾燥を行う、減圧乾燥法を組み合わせてもよい。
露光は、感光性着色組成物の塗布膜上に、ネガのマスクパターンを重ね、このマスクパターンを介し、紫外線又は可視光線の光源を照射して行う。露光マスクを用いて露光を行う場合には、露光マスクを感光性着色組成物の塗布膜に近接させる方法や、露光マスクを感光性着色組成物の塗布膜から離れた位置に配置し、該露光マスクを介した露光光を投影する方法によってもよい。また、マスクパターンを用いないレーザー光による走査露光方式によってもよい。この際、必要に応じ、酸素による光重合性層の感度の低下を防ぐため、脱酸素雰囲気下で行ったり、光重合性層上にポリビニルアルコール層などの酸素遮断層を形成した後に露光を行ったりしてもよい。
中間透過開口部は、例えば、微小な多角形の遮光ユニットを有するマトリックス状遮光パターンによって作製する方法等が知られている。また吸収体として、クロム系、モリブデン系、タングステン系、シリコン系などの材料の膜によって、光透過率を制御し作製する方法等が知られている。
また、近接露光方式の場合には、露光対象とマスクパターンとの距離としては、通常10μm以上、好ましくは50μm以上、より好ましくは75μm以上であり、通常500μm以下、好ましくは400μm以下、より好ましくは300μm以下である。
上記の露光を行った後、アルカリ性化合物の水溶液、又は有機溶剤を用いる現像によって、基板上に画像パターンを形成することができる。この水溶液には、さらに界面活性剤、有機溶剤、緩衝剤、錯化剤、染料又は顔料を含ませることができる。
現像の後の基板には、必要により上記の露光方法と同様な方法により追露光を行ってもよく、また熱硬化処理を行ってもよい。この際の熱硬化処理条件は、温度は100℃~280℃の範囲、好ましくは150℃~250℃の範囲で選ばれ、時間は5分間~60分間の範囲で選ばれる。
また、本発明の着色スペーサーの1μm当たりの光学濃度(OD)は、遮光性の観点から、1.2以上が好ましく、1.5以上がより好ましく、1.8以上がさらに好ましく、通常4.0以下であり、3.0以下であることが好ましい。ここで光学濃度(OD)は後述する方法にて測定した値である。
本発明のカラーフィルターは、上述のような本発明の着色スペーサーを備えるものであり、例えば透明基板としてのガラス基板上に、ブラックマトリクスと、赤色、緑色、青色の画素着色層と、オーバーコート層とが積層されて、着色スペーサーを形成した後配向膜を形成して製造される。
以下の実施例及び比較例で用いた感光性着色組成物の構成成分は次の通りである。
BASF社製、Irgaphor(登録商標) Black S 0100 CF(下記式(2)で表される化学構造を有する。)
プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート145質量部を窒素置換しながら撹拌し、120℃に昇温した。ここにスチレン10質量部、グリシジルメタクリレート85.2質量部およびトリシクロデカン骨格を有するモノアクリレート(日立化成社製FA-513M)66質量部を滴下し、および2,2’-アゾビス-2-メチルブチロニトリル8.47質量部を3時間かけて滴下し、更に90℃で2時間撹拌し続けた。次に反応容器内を空気置換に変え、アクリル酸43.2質量部にトリスジメチルアミノメチルフェノール0.7質量部およびハイドロキノン0.12質量部を投入し、100℃で12時間反応を続けた。その後、テトラヒドロ無水フタル酸(THPA)56.2質量部、トリエチルアミン0.7質量部を加え、100℃で3.5時間反応させた。こうして得られたアルカリ可溶性樹脂-AのGPCにより測定した重量平均分子量Mwは約8400、酸価は80mgKOH/gであった。
プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート217.6質量部とプロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテル53.9質量部との混合液を窒素置換しながら撹拌し、120℃に昇温した。ここにベンジルメタクリレート3.52質量部、メタクリル酸58.5質量部、トリシクロデカン骨格を有するモノアクリレートFA-513M(日立化成社製)66.1質量部及び2,2’-アゾビス-2-メチルブチロニトリル3.8質量部の混合液を3時間かけて滴下し、更に90℃で2時間撹拌し続けた。次に反応容器内を空気に置換し、グリシジルメタクリレート27.3質量部、トリスジメチルアミノメチルフェノール0.6質量部及びハイドロキノン0.1質量部を投入し、100℃で12時間反応を続けた。こうして得られたアルカリ可溶性樹脂-Bの重量平均分子量Mwは16500、酸価は176mgKOH/gであった。
プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート303.5質量部とプロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテル75.9質量部との混合液を窒素置換しながら撹拌し、120℃に昇温した。ここにスチレン10.4質量部、メタクリル酸34.4質量部、トリシクロデカン骨格を有するモノアクリレートFA-513M(日立化成社製)66.1質量部及び2,2’-アゾビス-2-メチルブチロニトリル8.7質量部の混合液を3時間かけて滴下し、更に90℃で2時間撹拌し続けた。次に反応容器内を空気に置換し、グリシジルメタクリレート9.9質量部、トリスジメチルアミノメチルフェノール0.2質量部及びハイドロキノン0.04質量部を投入し、100℃で12時間反応を続けた。こうして得られたアルカリ可溶性樹脂-Cの重量平均分子量Mwは7200、酸価は86mgKOH/gであった。
日本化薬社製「ZCR-1642H」(Mw=6500、酸価=98mgKOH/g)
上記エポキシアクリレート溶液25質量部及び、トリメチロールプロパン(TMP)0.76質量部、ビフェニルテトラカルボン酸2無水物(BPDA)3.3質量部、テトラヒドロフタル酸無水物(THPA)3.5質量部を、温度計、撹拌機、冷却管を取り付けたフラスコに入れ、撹拌しながら105℃までゆっくり昇温し反応させた。
樹脂溶液が透明になったところで、メトキシブチルアセテートで希釈し、固形分50質量%となるよう調製し、酸価113mgKOH/g、GPCで測定したポリスチレン換算の重量平均分子量(Mw)2600、二重結合当量520g/molのカルボキシル基含有エポキシメタアクリレート樹脂(アルカリ可溶性樹脂-E)を得た。
プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート214.5質量部とプロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテル53.6質量部との混合液を窒素置換しながら撹拌し、120℃に昇温した。ここにベンジルメタクリレート68.7質量部、メタクリル酸43.9質量部、トリシクロデカン骨格を有するモノアクリレートFA-513M(日立化成社製)22.0質量部及び2,2’-アゾビス-2-メチルブチロニトリル1.4質量部の混合液を3時間かけて滴下し、更に90℃で2時間撹拌し続けた。次に反応容器内を空気に置換し、グリシジルメタクリレート21.3質量部、トリスジメチルアミノメチルフェノール0.5質量部及びハイドロキノン0.1質量部を投入し、100℃で12時間反応を続けた。こうして得られたアルカリ可溶性樹脂-Fの重量平均分子量Mwは44100、酸価は130mgKOH/gであった。
プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート210.1質量部とプロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテル52.5質量部との混合液を窒素置換しながら撹拌し、120℃に昇温した。ここにベンジルメタクリレート3.52質量部、メタクリル酸68.8質量部、トリシクロデカン骨格を有するモノアクリレートFA-513M(日立化成社製)39.7質量部及び2,2’-アゾビス-2-メチルブチロニトリル3.3質量部の混合液を3時間かけて滴下し、更に90℃で2時間撹拌し続けた。次に反応容器内を空気に置換し、グリシジルメタクリレート38.4質量部、トリスジメチルアミノメチルフェノール0.8質量部及びハイドロキノン0.1質量部を投入し、100℃で12時間反応を続けた。こうして得られたアルカリ可溶性樹脂-Gの重量平均分子量Mwは19100、酸価は198mgKOH/gであった。
ビックケミー社製「DISPERBYK-LPN21116」(側鎖に4級アンモニウム塩基及び3級アミノ基を有するAブロックと、4級アンモニウム塩基及び3級アミノ基を有さないBブロックからなる、アクリル系A-Bブロック共重合体。アミン価は70mgKOH/g。酸価は1mgKOH/g以下。)
分散剤-IのAブロック中には、下記式(1a)及び(2a)の繰り返し単位が含まれ、Bブロック中には下記式(3a)の繰り返し単位が含まれる。分散剤-Iの全繰り返し単位に占める下記式(1a)、(2a)、及び(3a)の繰り返し単位の含有割合はそれぞれ11.1モル%、22.2モル%、6.7モル%である。
ビックケミー社製「DISPERBYK-167」(ウレタン系高分子分散剤)
ルーブリゾール社製「Solsperse12000」
<溶剤-I>
PGMEA:プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート
<溶剤-II>
MB:3-メトキシブタノール
下記構造の化合物
DPHA:日本化薬社製 ジペンタエリスリトールヘキサアクリレート
<添加剤>
日本化薬社製、KAYAMER PM-21(メタクリロイル基含有ホスフェート)
<界面活性剤>
DIC社製 メガファック F-559
単位膜厚当たりの光学濃度は以下の手順にて測定した。
まず、調製した感光性着色組成物を最終的な膜厚が2μmとなるようにスピンコーターにてガラス基板に塗布し、1分間減圧乾燥した後に、ホットプレート温度80℃にて70秒間乾燥した。露光及び現像工程を経てからオーブン温度230℃で20分間加熱する事で、レジスト塗工基板を得た。得られた基板の光学濃度(OD)を透過濃度計グレタグマクベスD200-IIによって測定し、膜厚を菱化システム社製非接触表面・層断面形状計測システム VertScan(R)2.0により測定し、光学濃度(OD)及び膜厚から、単位膜厚当たりの光学濃度を算出した。なお、OD値は遮光能力を示す数値であり、数値が大きい程高遮光性であることを示す。
N-メチルピロリドン(NMP)溶出試験は以下の手順にて行った。
まず、調製した感光性着色組成物を最終的な膜厚が2μmとなるようにスピンコーターにてガラス基板に塗布し、1分間減圧乾燥した後にホットプレート温度80℃で70秒間乾燥した。露光及び現像工程を経てからオーブン温度230℃で20分間加熱してレジスト塗工基板を得た。作製したレジスト塗工基板から測定用基板(2.5cm×1.0cm角)2枚を切り出してN-メチルピロリドン(NMP)8mL入りの10mL用バイアル瓶に浸漬した。そして、その測定用基板入りのバイアル瓶を80℃の熱浴に、40分間静置した状態でNMP溶出試験を実施した。40分静置後に熱浴からバイアル瓶を取り出して、そのNMP溶出溶液を分光光度計(島津製作所社製「UV-3100PC」)により300~800nmの波長範囲で1nmおきに吸光度を測定した。光源には、ハロゲンランプ及び重水素ランプ(切り替え波長360nm)を使用して、検出器には、フォトマルを使用しており、スリット幅2nmを測定条件としている。また、試料溶液(NMP溶出溶液)を1cm角の石英セルに入れて測定した。吸光度とは、分光法において、ある物体を光が通過した際に光強度がどの程度減衰するかを示す無次元量であり、以下の式で定義される。
○: 20(nm)未満
×: 20(nm)以上
表面平滑性及び下記の表面粗度の評価は以下の手順にて行った。
まず、調製した感光性着色組成物を最終的な膜厚が3μmとなるようにスピンコーターにてガラス基板に塗布し、1分間減圧乾燥した後にホットプレート温度80℃で70秒間乾燥した。露光及び現像工程を経てからオーブン温度230℃で20分間加熱してレジスト塗工基板を得た。作製したレジスト塗工基板について、加熱後の表面におけるシワの発生有無を光学顕微鏡にて70μm×70μmの視野で観察した。なお評価基準は、以下の通りである。
○:パターンの表面にミクロンオーダーのシワが観察されない
×:パターンの表面にミクロンオーダーのシワが著しく目立つ
上記<表面平滑性の評価>にて作製したレジスト塗工基板について、菱化システム社製三次元非接触表面形状計測システム Micromapにて、50倍の光学レンズを用い、Focusモードで70μm×70μmの視野において表面粗度Sa(算術平均粗さ、μm)を測定した。
表1に記載の顔料、分散剤、分散助剤、アルカリ可溶性樹脂、及び溶剤を、表1に記載の質量比となるように混合した。この混合液をペイントシェーカーにより25~45℃の範囲で3時間分散処理を行った。ビーズとしては、0.5mmφのジルコニアビーズを用い、分散液の2.5倍の質量を加えた。分散終了後、フィルターによりビーズと分散液を分離して、顔料分散液1、3及び4を調製した。
カーボンブラックは、通常のオイルファーネス法で製造した。但し、原料油としては、Na、Ca、S分量の少ないエチレンボトム油を用い、燃焼用にはコークス炉ガスを用いた。更に、反応停止水としては、イオン交換樹脂で処理した純水を用いた。得られたカーボンブラック540gを純水14500gと共にホモミキサーを用い5,000~6,000rpmで30分撹拌しスラリーを得た。このスラリーをスクリュー型撹拌機付容器に移し約1,000rpmで混合しながらエポキシ樹脂「エピコート828」(三菱化学社製)60gを溶解したトルエン600gを少量ずつ添加していった。約15分で、水に分散していたカーボンブラックは全量トルエン側に移行し、約1mmの粒となった。
得られた被覆カーボンブラック、分散剤、顔料誘導体及び溶剤を、表1に記載の質量比となるように混合した。
固形分比率が表2の配合割合となるように各成分を加え、さらに固形分が22質量%となるようにPGMEAを加え、撹拌、溶解させて、感光性着色組成物を調製した。調製した組成物の固形分比率を表2に示す。また、前述の方法にて測定した単位OD値、NMP溶出試験、表面平滑性及び表面粗さの評価結果を表2に示す。なお、表2中の感光性着色組成物の質量部は、固形分の質量部を示す。
これに対して、着色剤が紫外線吸収性の高いカーボンブラック単独である比較例3は、表面平滑性が不十分であった。
Claims (9)
- (a)着色剤、(b)アルカリ可溶性樹脂、(c)光重合開始剤、(d)エチレン性不飽和化合物、(e)溶剤、及び(f)分散剤を含有する感光性着色組成物であって、
前記(a)着色剤が、有機顔料及びカーボンブラックを含み、
前記(b)アルカリ可溶性樹脂が、(b-I)エポキシ(メタ)アクリレート樹脂と、(b-II)側鎖にエチレン性不飽和結合を有する繰り返し単位α及び不飽和カルボン酸由来の繰り返し単位βを含有する(メタ)アクリル共重合樹脂とを含み、かつ、
前記(b-II)(メタ)アクリル共重合樹脂における前記繰り返し単位αの含有割合が12モル%以上であることを特徴とする感光性着色組成物。 - 前記有機顔料が、下記一般式(1)で表される化合物、該化合物の幾何異性体、該化合物の塩及び該化合物の幾何異性体の塩からなる群から選択される少なくとも1つの有機黒色顔料を含む、請求項1に記載の感光性着色組成物。
R12、R13、R14、R15、R17、R18、R19およびR20は他の全てから互いに独立して水素原子、ハロゲン原子、R21、COOH、COOR21、COO-、CONH2、CONHR21、CONR21R22、CN、OH、OR21、COCR21、OCONH2、OCONHR21、OCONR21R22、NO2、NH2、NHR21、NR21R22、NHCOR22、NR21COR22、N=CH2、N=CHR21、N=CR21R22、SH、SR21、SOR21、SO2R21、SO3R21、SO3H、SO3 -、SO2NH2、SO2NHR21またはSO2NR21R22である;
且つ、R12とR13、R13とR14、R14とR15、R17とR18、R18とR19、及びR19とR20からなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1つの組み合わせは、互いに直接結合し、または酸素原子、硫黄原子、NH若しくはNR21ブリッジによって互いに結合することもできる;
R21およびR22は互いに独立して、炭素数1~12のアルキル基、炭素数3~12のシクロアルキル基、炭素数2~12のアルケニル基、炭素数3~12のシクロアルケニル基または炭素数2~12のアルキニル基である。) - (a)着色剤、(b)アルカリ可溶性樹脂、(c)光重合開始剤、(d)エチレン性不飽和化合物、(e)溶剤、及び(f)分散剤を含有する感光性着色組成物であって、
前記(a)着色剤が、赤色顔料及び橙色顔料からなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1種と、青色顔料及び紫色顔料からなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1種を含み、
前記(b)アルカリ可溶性樹脂が、(b-I)エポキシ(メタ)アクリレート樹脂と、(b-II)側鎖にエチレン性不飽和結合を有する繰り返し単位α及び不飽和カルボン酸由来の繰り返し単位βを含有する(メタ)アクリル共重合樹脂とを含み、かつ、
前記(b-II)(メタ)アクリル共重合樹脂における前記繰り返し単位αの含有割合が12モル%以上であることを特徴とする感光性着色組成物。 - 前記(b-II)(メタ)アクリル共重合樹脂の含有割合が、感光性着色組成物中の全固形分に対して1質量%以上である、請求項1~4のいずれか1項に記載の感光性着色組成物。
- 硬化した塗膜の膜厚1μm当たりの光学濃度が1.0以上である、請求項1~5のいずれか1項に記載の感光性着色組成物。
- 請求項1~6のいずれか1項に記載の感光性着色組成物を硬化して得られる硬化物。
- 請求項7に記載の硬化物から形成される着色スペーサー。
- 請求項8に記載の着色スペーサーを備える画像表示装置。
Priority Applications (3)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
KR1020187017921A KR102540423B1 (ko) | 2015-12-24 | 2016-12-21 | 감광성 착색 조성물, 경화물, 착색 스페이서, 화상 표시 장치 |
CN201680075723.5A CN108475012B (zh) | 2015-12-24 | 2016-12-21 | 感光性着色组合物、固化物、着色间隔物、图像显示装置 |
JP2017543406A JP6268508B2 (ja) | 2015-12-24 | 2016-12-21 | 感光性着色組成物、硬化物、着色スペーサー、画像表示装置 |
Applications Claiming Priority (2)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
JP2015252149 | 2015-12-24 | ||
JP2015-252149 | 2015-12-24 |
Publications (1)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
WO2017110893A1 true WO2017110893A1 (ja) | 2017-06-29 |
Family
ID=59089487
Family Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
PCT/JP2016/088144 WO2017110893A1 (ja) | 2015-12-24 | 2016-12-21 | 感光性着色組成物、硬化物、着色スペーサー、画像表示装置 |
Country Status (5)
Country | Link |
---|---|
JP (2) | JP6268508B2 (ja) |
KR (1) | KR102540423B1 (ja) |
CN (1) | CN108475012B (ja) |
TW (1) | TWI711882B (ja) |
WO (1) | WO2017110893A1 (ja) |
Cited By (8)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
KR101869205B1 (ko) * | 2017-10-13 | 2018-07-19 | 동우 화인켐 주식회사 | 착색 감광성 수지 조성물 및 이로부터 형성되는 패턴층, 이를 포함하는 컬러필터 및 이를 포함하는 액정 디스플레이 장치 |
JP6374595B1 (ja) * | 2017-09-26 | 2018-08-15 | 東京応化工業株式会社 | 感光性樹脂組成物、硬化膜、表示装置、及びパターン形成方法 |
US20190018318A1 (en) * | 2016-01-18 | 2019-01-17 | Rohm And Haas Electronic Materials Korea Ltd. | Black photosensitive resin composition and black column spacer prepared therefrom |
WO2019065686A1 (ja) * | 2017-09-26 | 2019-04-04 | 大阪有機化学工業株式会社 | フォトスペーサ形成用感光性樹脂組成物、フォトスペーサの形成方法、フォトスペーサ付基板、及び、カラーフィルタ |
JP2020126117A (ja) * | 2019-02-04 | 2020-08-20 | 三菱ケミカル株式会社 | 感光性着色樹脂組成物、硬化物、及び画像表示装置 |
CN111694216A (zh) * | 2019-03-12 | 2020-09-22 | 东友精细化工有限公司 | 有机发光二极管用蓝色感光性树脂组合物、包含其的滤色器及图像显示装置 |
KR20200115462A (ko) * | 2018-01-26 | 2020-10-07 | 미쯔비시 케미컬 주식회사 | 착색 감광성 수지 조성물, 격벽, 유기 전계 발광 소자, 화상 표시 장치 및 조명 |
KR20210057153A (ko) * | 2019-11-06 | 2021-05-20 | 미쯔비시 케미컬 주식회사 | 감광성 수지 조성물, 경화물, 격벽, 유기 전계 발광 소자, 컬러 필터 및 화상 표시 장치 |
Families Citing this family (7)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
CN106194517B (zh) * | 2016-08-31 | 2019-10-22 | 北汽福田汽车股份有限公司 | 燃油加热系统 |
TWI765958B (zh) * | 2018-01-19 | 2022-06-01 | 南韓商東友精細化工有限公司 | 著色感光性樹脂組成物、包括使用著色感光性樹脂組成物製造之黑色矩陣、柱間隔物或黑色柱間隔物的彩色濾光片、以及包括彩色濾光片的顯示裝置 |
KR102048770B1 (ko) * | 2018-02-27 | 2019-11-26 | 애경화학 주식회사 | 디싸이클로펜타디엔 에폭시 아크릴레이트를 포함하는 내열성과 기계적 물성이 우수한 3d프린팅용 광경화 수지 잉크조성물 |
US20200201180A1 (en) * | 2018-12-21 | 2020-06-25 | Rohm And Haas Electronic Materials Korea Ltd. | Colored photosensitive resin composition and black matrix prepared therefrom |
KR102560228B1 (ko) * | 2018-12-24 | 2023-07-27 | 동우 화인켐 주식회사 | 흑색 감광성 수지 조성물 및 이로부터 형성되는 컬러필터와 액정 디스플레이 장치 |
JP7360798B2 (ja) * | 2019-02-21 | 2023-10-13 | サカタインクス株式会社 | 着色組成物、及び、それを含有する着色レジスト組成物 |
CN114945867B (zh) * | 2020-01-21 | 2023-05-16 | 东丽株式会社 | 正型感光性树脂组合物、固化膜、层叠体、带导电图案的基板、层叠体的制造方法、触控面板及有机el显示装置 |
Citations (7)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JP2005181384A (ja) * | 2003-12-16 | 2005-07-07 | Toyo Ink Mfg Co Ltd | カラーフィルタ用赤色着色組成物およびカラーフィルタ |
JP2011099919A (ja) * | 2009-11-04 | 2011-05-19 | Mitsubishi Chemicals Corp | 着色樹脂組成物、カラーフィルタ、液晶表示装置及び有機elディスプレイ |
WO2013062011A1 (ja) * | 2011-10-25 | 2013-05-02 | 三菱化学株式会社 | 着色感光性組成物、着色スペーサ、カラーフィルター、及び液晶表示装置 |
JP2014164262A (ja) * | 2013-02-27 | 2014-09-08 | Mitsubishi Chemicals Corp | 感光性樹脂組成物、これを硬化させてなる硬化物、カラーフィルタ及び液晶表示装置 |
WO2015046178A1 (ja) * | 2013-09-25 | 2015-04-02 | 三菱化学株式会社 | 感光性着色組成物、ブラックマトリクス、着色スペーサー、画像表示装置及び顔料分散液 |
JP2015185096A (ja) * | 2014-03-26 | 2015-10-22 | 東レ株式会社 | 遮光膜形成基板及びタッチパネル |
JP2015191234A (ja) * | 2014-03-27 | 2015-11-02 | 三星エスディアイ株式会社Samsung SDI Co.,Ltd. | ブラックカラムスペーサの製造方法、並びにブラックカラムスペーサおよびカラーフィルター |
Family Cites Families (16)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JPH08234212A (ja) | 1995-02-28 | 1996-09-13 | Casio Comput Co Ltd | 液晶表示素子 |
US20100243970A1 (en) * | 2007-08-22 | 2010-09-30 | Mitsubishi Chemical Corporation | Resin black matrix, light blocking photosensitive resin composition, tft element substrate and liquid crystal display device |
JP2012018246A (ja) * | 2010-07-07 | 2012-01-26 | Mitsubishi Chemicals Corp | 着色感光性樹脂組成物、硬化物及び液晶表示装置 |
JP2013134263A (ja) | 2011-12-22 | 2013-07-08 | Tokyo Ohka Kogyo Co Ltd | ブラックカラムスペーサ用感光性樹脂組成物、ブラックカラムスペーサ、表示装置、及びブラックカラムスペーサの形成方法 |
WO2013115268A1 (ja) | 2012-01-31 | 2013-08-08 | 三菱化学株式会社 | 着色感光性組成物、ブラックフォトスペーサー、及びカラーフィルター |
TWI585527B (zh) * | 2012-02-29 | 2017-06-01 | 新日鐵住金化學股份有限公司 | A photosensitive composition for black matrix and a method for producing the same |
JP6018704B2 (ja) * | 2012-05-30 | 2016-11-02 | エルジー・ケム・リミテッド | 感光性樹脂組成物および前記感光性樹脂組成物から製造されたベゼルパターンを含むタッチパネル |
US9217070B2 (en) * | 2012-06-01 | 2015-12-22 | Basf Se | Black colorant mixture |
JP6065596B2 (ja) * | 2013-01-16 | 2017-01-25 | Jsr株式会社 | 感放射線性着色組成物、着色硬化膜及び表示素子 |
JP6062278B2 (ja) * | 2013-02-14 | 2017-01-18 | クラリアント・ファイナンス・(ビーブイアイ)・リミテッド | 黒色顔料組成物 |
JP6147143B2 (ja) * | 2013-08-28 | 2017-06-14 | 富士フイルム株式会社 | 着色感光性樹脂組成物、硬化膜、カラーフィルタ、カラーフィルタの製造方法、固体撮像素子、および画像表示装置 |
KR20150026246A (ko) * | 2013-09-02 | 2015-03-11 | 동우 화인켐 주식회사 | 투명화소 형성용 감광성 수지조성물 |
CN111367143B (zh) * | 2014-03-07 | 2023-10-31 | 日铁化学材料株式会社 | 遮光膜用黑色树脂组合物、带遮光膜的基板、彩色滤光片及触控屏 |
KR20150107491A (ko) * | 2014-03-14 | 2015-09-23 | 동우 화인켐 주식회사 | 착색 감광성 수지 조성물 |
KR102344138B1 (ko) * | 2014-03-31 | 2021-12-28 | 닛테츠 케미컬 앤드 머티리얼 가부시키가이샤 | 차광막용 감광성 수지 조성물, 이것을 경화한 차광막 및 컬러 필터 |
WO2015182384A1 (ja) * | 2014-05-27 | 2015-12-03 | 富士フイルム株式会社 | 遮光性組成物 |
-
2016
- 2016-12-21 CN CN201680075723.5A patent/CN108475012B/zh active Active
- 2016-12-21 KR KR1020187017921A patent/KR102540423B1/ko active IP Right Grant
- 2016-12-21 JP JP2017543406A patent/JP6268508B2/ja active Active
- 2016-12-21 WO PCT/JP2016/088144 patent/WO2017110893A1/ja active Application Filing
- 2016-12-23 TW TW105142935A patent/TWI711882B/zh active
-
2017
- 2017-12-22 JP JP2017246209A patent/JP6919554B2/ja active Active
Patent Citations (7)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JP2005181384A (ja) * | 2003-12-16 | 2005-07-07 | Toyo Ink Mfg Co Ltd | カラーフィルタ用赤色着色組成物およびカラーフィルタ |
JP2011099919A (ja) * | 2009-11-04 | 2011-05-19 | Mitsubishi Chemicals Corp | 着色樹脂組成物、カラーフィルタ、液晶表示装置及び有機elディスプレイ |
WO2013062011A1 (ja) * | 2011-10-25 | 2013-05-02 | 三菱化学株式会社 | 着色感光性組成物、着色スペーサ、カラーフィルター、及び液晶表示装置 |
JP2014164262A (ja) * | 2013-02-27 | 2014-09-08 | Mitsubishi Chemicals Corp | 感光性樹脂組成物、これを硬化させてなる硬化物、カラーフィルタ及び液晶表示装置 |
WO2015046178A1 (ja) * | 2013-09-25 | 2015-04-02 | 三菱化学株式会社 | 感光性着色組成物、ブラックマトリクス、着色スペーサー、画像表示装置及び顔料分散液 |
JP2015185096A (ja) * | 2014-03-26 | 2015-10-22 | 東レ株式会社 | 遮光膜形成基板及びタッチパネル |
JP2015191234A (ja) * | 2014-03-27 | 2015-11-02 | 三星エスディアイ株式会社Samsung SDI Co.,Ltd. | ブラックカラムスペーサの製造方法、並びにブラックカラムスペーサおよびカラーフィルター |
Cited By (18)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US20190018318A1 (en) * | 2016-01-18 | 2019-01-17 | Rohm And Haas Electronic Materials Korea Ltd. | Black photosensitive resin composition and black column spacer prepared therefrom |
US10884335B2 (en) * | 2016-01-18 | 2021-01-05 | Rohm And Haas Electronic Materials Korea Ltd. | Black photosensitive resin composition and black column spacer prepared therefrom |
JPWO2019065686A1 (ja) * | 2017-09-26 | 2020-11-26 | 大阪有機化学工業株式会社 | フォトスペーサ形成用感光性樹脂組成物、フォトスペーサの形成方法、フォトスペーサ付基板、及び、カラーフィルタ |
JP2019061216A (ja) * | 2017-09-26 | 2019-04-18 | 東京応化工業株式会社 | 感光性樹脂組成物、硬化膜、表示装置、及びパターン形成方法 |
JP7309609B2 (ja) | 2017-09-26 | 2023-07-18 | 大阪有機化学工業株式会社 | フォトスペーサ形成用感光性樹脂組成物、フォトスペーサの形成方法、フォトスペーサ付基板、及び、カラーフィルタ |
WO2019065686A1 (ja) * | 2017-09-26 | 2019-04-04 | 大阪有機化学工業株式会社 | フォトスペーサ形成用感光性樹脂組成物、フォトスペーサの形成方法、フォトスペーサ付基板、及び、カラーフィルタ |
JP6374595B1 (ja) * | 2017-09-26 | 2018-08-15 | 東京応化工業株式会社 | 感光性樹脂組成物、硬化膜、表示装置、及びパターン形成方法 |
KR101869205B1 (ko) * | 2017-10-13 | 2018-07-19 | 동우 화인켐 주식회사 | 착색 감광성 수지 조성물 및 이로부터 형성되는 패턴층, 이를 포함하는 컬러필터 및 이를 포함하는 액정 디스플레이 장치 |
KR102393444B1 (ko) * | 2018-01-26 | 2022-05-03 | 미쯔비시 케미컬 주식회사 | 착색 감광성 수지 조성물, 격벽, 유기 전계 발광 소자, 화상 표시 장치 및 조명 |
KR20200115462A (ko) * | 2018-01-26 | 2020-10-07 | 미쯔비시 케미컬 주식회사 | 착색 감광성 수지 조성물, 격벽, 유기 전계 발광 소자, 화상 표시 장치 및 조명 |
KR20220058646A (ko) * | 2018-01-26 | 2022-05-09 | 미쯔비시 케미컬 주식회사 | 착색 감광성 수지 조성물, 격벽, 유기 전계 발광 소자, 화상 표시 장치 및 조명 |
KR102562409B1 (ko) * | 2018-01-26 | 2023-08-02 | 미쯔비시 케미컬 주식회사 | 착색 감광성 수지 조성물, 격벽, 유기 전계 발광 소자, 화상 표시 장치 및 조명 |
JP2020126117A (ja) * | 2019-02-04 | 2020-08-20 | 三菱ケミカル株式会社 | 感光性着色樹脂組成物、硬化物、及び画像表示装置 |
JP7331371B2 (ja) | 2019-02-04 | 2023-08-23 | 三菱ケミカル株式会社 | 感光性着色樹脂組成物、硬化物、及び画像表示装置 |
CN111694216A (zh) * | 2019-03-12 | 2020-09-22 | 东友精细化工有限公司 | 有机发光二极管用蓝色感光性树脂组合物、包含其的滤色器及图像显示装置 |
CN111694216B (zh) * | 2019-03-12 | 2023-10-03 | 东友精细化工有限公司 | 有机发光二极管用蓝色感光性树脂组合物、包含其的滤色器及图像显示装置 |
KR20210057153A (ko) * | 2019-11-06 | 2021-05-20 | 미쯔비시 케미컬 주식회사 | 감광성 수지 조성물, 경화물, 격벽, 유기 전계 발광 소자, 컬러 필터 및 화상 표시 장치 |
KR102319573B1 (ko) * | 2019-11-06 | 2021-10-29 | 미쯔비시 케미컬 주식회사 | 감광성 수지 조성물, 경화물, 격벽, 유기 전계 발광 소자, 컬러 필터 및 화상 표시 장치 |
Also Published As
Publication number | Publication date |
---|---|
KR20180096648A (ko) | 2018-08-29 |
CN108475012B (zh) | 2022-07-15 |
KR102540423B1 (ko) | 2023-06-05 |
TWI711882B (zh) | 2020-12-01 |
JP6268508B2 (ja) | 2018-01-31 |
JPWO2017110893A1 (ja) | 2017-12-21 |
JP6919554B2 (ja) | 2021-08-18 |
CN108475012A (zh) | 2018-08-31 |
TW201732431A (zh) | 2017-09-16 |
JP2018081317A (ja) | 2018-05-24 |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
JP7485147B2 (ja) | 感光性着色組成物、硬化物、着色スペーサー、画像表示装置 | |
JP6268508B2 (ja) | 感光性着色組成物、硬化物、着色スペーサー、画像表示装置 | |
WO2015046178A1 (ja) | 感光性着色組成物、ブラックマトリクス、着色スペーサー、画像表示装置及び顔料分散液 | |
JP6380723B1 (ja) | 感光性着色組成物、硬化物、着色スペーサー、画像表示装置 | |
TWI794156B (zh) | 著色間隔件形成用感光性著色組合物、硬化物、著色間隔件、圖像顯示裝置 | |
JP6543968B2 (ja) | 感光性着色組成物、硬化物、着色スペーサー、及び画像表示装置 | |
JP2016177190A (ja) | 着色スペーサー形成用感光性着色組成物、硬化物、着色スペーサー、画像表示装置 | |
JP6528475B2 (ja) | 感光性着色組成物、硬化物、着色スペーサー、及び画像表示装置 | |
JP2022078139A (ja) | 感光性着色組成物、硬化物、着色スペーサー、画像表示装置 | |
JP6561533B2 (ja) | 感光性着色組成物、硬化物、着色スペーサー、画像表示装置 | |
JP2018205605A (ja) | 着色感光性樹脂組成物、硬化物、有機電界発光素子、画像表示装置及び照明 | |
JP2017053942A (ja) | 感光性着色組成物、硬化物、着色スペーサー、及び画像表示装置 | |
JP2019015966A (ja) | 感光性着色組成物、硬化物、着色スペーサー、及び画像表示装置 | |
JP7375773B2 (ja) | 感光性着色組成物、硬化物、着色スペーサー、及び画像表示装置 | |
JP7302262B2 (ja) | 感光性着色樹脂組成物、硬化物、及び画像表示装置 | |
JP7230559B2 (ja) | 感光性着色組成物、硬化物、着色スペーサー、及び画像表示装置 | |
JP7351221B2 (ja) | 感光性着色組成物、硬化物、着色スペーサー、及び画像表示装置 | |
JP7006358B2 (ja) | 感光性着色組成物、硬化物、着色スペーサー、及び画像表示装置 |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
ENP | Entry into the national phase |
Ref document number: 2017543406 Country of ref document: JP Kind code of ref document: A |
|
121 | Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application |
Ref document number: 16878780 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |
|
ENP | Entry into the national phase |
Ref document number: 20187017921 Country of ref document: KR Kind code of ref document: A |
|
NENP | Non-entry into the national phase |
Ref country code: DE |
|
122 | Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase |
Ref document number: 16878780 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |